<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mwillard</id>
	<title>Adjutant Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mwillard"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Mwillard"/>
	<updated>2026-04-30T01:55:24Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.31.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=MASTER_CID_Copy_Guide&amp;diff=5961</id>
		<title>MASTER CID Copy Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=MASTER_CID_Copy_Guide&amp;diff=5961"/>
		<updated>2026-02-03T22:55:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: /* Update Master ENT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This guide covers the initial CID creation and basic CID Maintenance update process when creating a new CID using a MASTER CID as a template.  This guide also covers the additional steps needed to update related system elements after a MASTER CID copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not a complete guide for System Manager setup. The System Manager Setup Guide should be followed to complete setting up a new CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Submit Request to Development ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Open a ticket (Install Adjutant Desktop) to Development to copy the MASTER CID database to the new customer server location.  Include all necessary details and instructions for any special circumstances.  Send an email with additional information (and copy all team members) if it is too much to fit into the ticket comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create the &amp;#039;6.4.4 Install Adj 2020&amp;#039; task on the 1st of the month after the Needs Analysis is complete because when that task is completed it fires a route to start recurring monthly invoices for licensing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verify the CID is Accessible and Create a Shortcut ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the ticket is complete, there should be a folder on the server named for the new customer*, with an RDP Desktop shortcut to the new installation. If there is no shortcut available, navigate to the customers folder in the RDP C:\ drive.  From the Adjutant sub-folder in the customer’s folder, create a shortcut to the ‘AdjLoaderV9.exe’ file. Copy that shortcut to the RDP Desktop and rename it accordingly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; For Non-Hosted installations, the Adjutant folder will generally be under an ‘Apps’ folder on one of the server resources. There should still be a C:\ drive location. Confirm with Development which network location the Adjutant software is installed under. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; If you create the shortcut from the C:\ drive location, you don’t get the security warnings that you get if the shortcut points to the network drive location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create the New CID Record==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From CID Maintenance, Add the CID details for the new customer. The ‘CID’ value sets the CID name. Saving the record will prompt a ‘Copy Settings From’ screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will not be able to fill in the MASTER ENT value until after you create the new CID and the new MASTER ENT record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the following records in the ‘Copy Settings from’ screen and press ‘Copy’. A series of processes will run to create the new CID. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do not interrupt these processes.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; It usually only takes a minute for hosted customers.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Fiscal Calendar&lt;br /&gt;
**	System Rules&lt;br /&gt;
**	CID Defaults and Setup Options&lt;br /&gt;
**	User Security Tokens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Copy CID.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Exit Adjutant and log back in to access the newly created CID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the CSTRING.TXT File ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Locate the CSTRING.TXT file in the Adjutant folder and edit the CID name to match your new CID. This file determines which security method (New vs. Old) is used, among other things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CSTRING.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create the Master ENT Organization ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*At the top right of the screen, select the new CID in the CID drop down. &lt;br /&gt;
*Create an Organization for the new company. Match the Organization ID to the CID. Assign the following attributes:&lt;br /&gt;
**	Bill To / Ship To / Sold To&lt;br /&gt;
**	Inventory Owner&lt;br /&gt;
**	Remit To / Sold From&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Complete the Initial CID Basic Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the following setup items in CID Maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Update Master ENT ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Update the &amp;#039;Master ENT&amp;#039; value in CID Maintenance to the newly created Org ID from the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the CID will be using a currency other than USD, additional options can be added to the Currency field drop down via the Currency Master screen. This screen is not in the Menu Prompts by default and will need to be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set the GL Mask ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	The GL Mask in the CID Maintenance - Accounts tab must be updated via SQL with the following QRY&lt;br /&gt;
**	Update CID set GLMASK = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;X-XXXX-XX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; where CID = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  (Set the GL Mask to the desired format using X and – characters. Replace ‘&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;’ with actual CID)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Complete the GL Accounts / Warehouse / Held For Setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to proceed with the next steps, you must add at least one GL account and a default Warehouse.  Ideally, you should import the full chart of accounts at this step. However, If the complete chart of accounts is not available at this point, you can use a temporary GL account that will have to be replaced later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Once you have a chart of accounts, or at least one active GL account, add the default Warehouse record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The default Warehouse name should match the CID name. In most cases, the ‘Default Location’, ‘Active’, and ‘Production Plant’ checkboxes should be checked. You must complete the blank GL accounts in the ‘Account’ tab in order to save the record.  The add process will create a new Organization with a ‘Warehouse Location’ attribute. &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Do not check the &amp;quot;Distribution Whse&amp;#039; box unless you know how it is used. It will prevent the Warehouse from being used in Order Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Warehouse1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Warehouse2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Update the ‘Item Held For Codes (HOLDER) Rule Maintenance record to replace the entry for MASTER with the new customer name and vendor number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Unwanted Fiscal Calendar Header Records (FISCALH)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data copied from MASTER will have many years of fiscal calendar details that clients do not need loaded. These fiscal calendars are copied in the first step to create the new CID. They can either be deleted before that first step, or any time after the new CID is created. The fiscal calendars must be deleted via SQL and should be reviewed carefully before deciding which years will be needed for the customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review the calendars that exist in the FISCALH SQL table. Fiscal Calendar header records are saved by CID and Fiscal Year. Delete any KEYNO records in this table that will not be needed for the new customer. A good rule of thumb is that you can delete all but the current and prior year in the new CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The FISCALD SQL table contains the individual months/periods for each KEYNO listed in the FISCALH table. These records can be left in place and should not affect anything once the FISCALH KEYNO value is deleted.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the DROPFOLDERS Rule ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DROPFOLDERS rule will have the file path from the MASTER CID. Each rule detail record will need to be updated with the correct file path for the new installation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;All file paths should be entered with the full UNC path.  Certain Inbox reader functions require the UNC path, rather than just the drive letter and folder structure.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the procedure outlined below (or perform 30 individual edits to paste the right path prefix into each rule detail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	In SQL, run the following query to show the RHYKEYNO and the rule details associate with the DROPFOLDERS rule for the new CID. Replace the AAAA value in the query with the new CID name.&lt;br /&gt;
**      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select rhkeyno, keyno, text2 from rd where rhkeyno in (select keyno from rh where name = &amp;#039;dropfolders&amp;#039; and cid = &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       All rule detail records from the SQL query above should have the same same RHEYNO value, which is the keyno value of the DROPFOLDERS rule header record that you will need to replace in the next query.&lt;br /&gt;
*       All rule detail records should have &amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039; in the TEXT2 field in front of the &amp;#039;\DROPFOLDERS\ . . .&amp;#039; path details.  This is the base file path that you will need to replace in the next query. You will also need the new UNC file path that will replace the MASTER base file path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       In SQL, run the query below to perform a find/replace on the file path in the TEXT2 field. Replace &amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039; with &amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039; from the query above. Replace &amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039; with the new CID&amp;#039;s base file path. Replace the &amp;#039;####&amp;#039; RHKEYNO value with the RHKEYNO shown from the query above. The single quotes around &amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039; are part of the query format and must be there.&lt;br /&gt;
**      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Update rd set text2 = replace(text2,&amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039;,&amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039;) where rhkeyno = ####&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***     An example query would look like - Update rd set text2 = replace(text2,&amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039;,&amp;#039;\\SERVER1234-APP\APPS\ADJ\STEELMAX&amp;#039;) where rhkeyno = 2999&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       You can re-run the first query above to confirm that the replace worked as expected. If there are any issues, adjust the second query as needed to replace the base/new file path text with the desired details. You can test that the DROPFOLDERS path is working by trying to access the Document Vault from an Adjutant organization record and checking the &amp;#039;Open in Root Folder&amp;#039; button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fix the ABIS _ADMIN record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hard-coded _ADMIN (or BACKDOOR) security record relies on a Contact record in the primary CID that has a USERID of &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039;.  In order for this record to work properly, it needs to either be repointed to a Contact record in the new CID, or it needs to be recreated entirely. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE - DO NOT set the Active User flag for the ABIS _ADMIN record. By design, the _ADMIN user should not use a customer license. Flagging the Active User field will prevent the _ADMIN user record from working and will exhibit all types of problematic behavior until you clear the Active User flag.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Option 1 – Point the existing ‘_ADMIN’ record from the copied MASTER CID to a new Contact record that you create in the new CID (retains all security overrides from MASTER)&lt;br /&gt;
**	Add an ‘Abis Admin’ Contact record and add the ‘User in Adjutant’ attribute, but click on the X to close the User in Adjutant screen without saving it.&lt;br /&gt;
***     Set the &amp;#039;Email Address&amp;#039; value to your abiscorp.com address. This will be used throughout the implementation for the from address on system emails.&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, look up the Contact record you just added for &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; and make a note of the CONTID in the VCONTACT table.&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, find the KEYNO value for the existing &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039; Userid in the USERID table. This is the record that needs to get updated in the next step to link to the new &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; Contact record. &lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, run the QRY below and replace the CONTID value with the CONTID for the &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; record that you got from the VCONATCT table, and replace the KEYNO with the KEYNO from the &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039; Userid record in previous step:&lt;br /&gt;
***	update userid set contid = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;#####&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; where keyno = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;###&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**	Exit Adjutant and log back in, and clicking on the Contact button should display your Abis Admin contact.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Edit the User in Adjutant record to set the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default CID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default WHSE values&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for you new CID.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Also in the User in Adjutant record, remove the SMTP settings or reset them to use the customer&amp;#039;s email settings. &lt;br /&gt;
***     The abiscorp.com email settings should not be left in place or copied to other user records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Option 2 – Delete the ‘_ADMIN’ UserID and recreate it&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, delete the entire USERID table (it should only contain _ADMIN and any test records from the MASTER CID at this point)&lt;br /&gt;
**	Add an ‘Abis Admin’ contact record and assign the ‘User in Adjutant’ attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Set the UserID to ‘_ADMIN’ and set the Password to ‘XXXX’ (the password doesn’t matter, it is set elsewhere).&lt;br /&gt;
**	Clear the ‘Active User’ flag and any other ‘Named User’ flags. Set the default CID and WHSE fields, as well as any other settings appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Also in the User in Adjutant record, remove the SMTP settings or reset them to use the customer&amp;#039;s email settings. &lt;br /&gt;
***     The abiscorp.com email settings should not be left in place or copied to other user records.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Exit Adjutant and log back in, and clicking on the Contact button should display your Abis Admin contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fix Nite Inventory Emails and Overall Email Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory vs GL Dump Accounts (INVDUMP)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; rule copied from MASTER contains an email setting that either needs to be updated or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
** Update the MASTER SysAdmin&amp;#039;s email setting (currently fdonovan@abiscorp.com) to your email address to get the &amp;#039;Night GL vs Inv Summary&amp;#039; reports to your email. This can be changed to the customer&amp;#039;s email as the implementation progresses.&lt;br /&gt;
** Alternatively, delete the rule detail for the email setting. This will prevent anyone from receiving the nightly email. This can be added back with a customer email address later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Update the email setting (text2) in the AUTOBATCH rule to either remove fdonovan@abiscorp.com or update it to a customer or Strategist email address. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that the &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; Contact record is set with your abiscorp.com email address (or a designated team member on the implementation) for the duration of the implementation. The email linked to the _ADMIN Contact record is used as the from address for several system emails. This can be set to the customer&amp;#039;s email address for a Systems Administrator once they are in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The poptext.txt and inboxtext.txt files that were copied from MASTER still have abiscorp.com settings and passwords. These should either to be set to the customer&amp;#039;s desired email server settings, or they should be fixed so that emails are not being accidentally routed through abiscorp servers inappropriately. &lt;br /&gt;
** Copies of these files named &amp;#039;poptext - copy&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;inboxtext - copy&amp;#039; should exist in the copied Adjutant folder. The text in these files has been updated to replace all of the abiscorp settings and passwords. These files can be renamed or their data can be copied and pasted to the respective poptext and inboxtext files until the customer provides the correct email settings for their system. &lt;br /&gt;
**Alternatively, you can adjust any references in the poptext and inboxtext file that refer to abiscorp.com, as well as any password text so that the settings will not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Once these email settings are updated, use the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Server Tools&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; utility to restart ALL running services for the new CID. The services pull the system email settings from the _ADMIN Contact at startup, so they must be restarted to pull any changes made to the _ADMIN record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Move Email Templates to the New CID &amp;amp; Update ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email Templates are currently not copied in the CID Copy process. They should all exist in the EMAILSETTING SQL table under the MASTER CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Run the following SQL QRY to ‘move’ the MASTER Email Templates to the new CID where &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039; is the new CID:&lt;br /&gt;
**	&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;update emailsetting set CID = &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039; where CID = &amp;#039;MASTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** Note that there are database entries for MASTER and JONESCO. The above query should prevent duplicate template records from getting created for the multiple CIDs in MASTER data. &lt;br /&gt;
*Review and update the Email Templates Subject lines and update these to the new customer&amp;#039;s name. Replace references to MASTER CID with the customer in all templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update Form and Report Filenames With the New CID ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MASTER customized forms and reports should all exist under the Adjutant main folder with ‘MASTER’ in the form name.  These will need to be renamed in order to default as the Default Custom form in each application&amp;#039;s Message Control screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Option 1 - Use PowerShell to replace the CID (MASTER) value on all file names===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Launch Windows PowerShell from the RDP Start menu.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Type &amp;#039;X:&amp;#039; (where X is the root drive letter of the Adjutant folder on the RDP server) and hit Enter to access the root folder. Or you can use &amp;#039;CD\&amp;#039; and hit Enter. &lt;br /&gt;
*Change to the desired CID&amp;#039;s Adjutant directory, one folder at a time with the &amp;#039;CD XXXX&amp;#039; command. If PowerShell lets you change directly to a subfolder, can&amp;#039;t figure it out. &lt;br /&gt;
**Type &amp;#039;CD CID&amp;#039; then Enter (Replace CID with your customer&amp;#039;s CID folder name, or first-level folder name)&lt;br /&gt;
**Type &amp;#039;CD ADJUTANT&amp;#039; then Enter (If they are using something other than &amp;#039;ADJUTANT&amp;#039; as their main folder, replace with their main folder name)&lt;br /&gt;
**For example, to access the live Adjutant folder in &amp;#039;X:\Resource\Apps\LiveAdj\&amp;#039;, you would do that in 3 steps - &amp;#039;CD RESOURCE&amp;#039;, then &amp;#039;CD APPS&amp;#039;, then &amp;#039;CD LIVEADJ&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**The &amp;#039;DIR&amp;#039; command will list all folders and files in the selected directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy the expression below and paste into the PowerShell cursor to rename all FRX files. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMPORTANT - replace the text &amp;#039;newcid&amp;#039; with your customer&amp;#039;s CID name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Get-ChildItem -Filter &amp;quot;*master*.frx&amp;quot; | Rename-Item -NewName {$_.name -replace &amp;#039;master&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;NEWCID&amp;#039;}&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy the expression below and paste into the PowerShell cursor to rename all FRT files. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMPORTANT - replace the text &amp;#039;newcid&amp;#039; with your customer&amp;#039;s CID name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Get-ChildItem -Filter &amp;quot;*master*.frt&amp;quot; | Rename-Item -NewName {$_.name -replace &amp;#039;master&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;NEWCID&amp;#039;}&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type &amp;#039;EXIT&amp;#039; and then Enter to close PowerShell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Option 2 - Use File Explorer to individually replace the CID (MASTER) value in each file name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The FRT/FRX filenames can be renamed in File Explorer to replace ‘MASTER’ with the new CID name. &lt;br /&gt;
**      Set the view mode to detail, and set the search options to exclude subfolders.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Navigate to the customer&amp;#039;s Adjutant folder.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Use the folder search tool and search for *MASTER.FR* to return a list of all files with MASTER in the file name. There may be more than just form files here.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Highlight each file, then single-click on the file name to edit the file name. Replace MASTER with the new CID. Do not change any other file name details. TIP – the arrow keys and TAB key will navigate you through each file and keep you in edit mode. &lt;br /&gt;
**	These do not all have to be changed at this time. They can be updated as setup proceeds in each module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenameFile2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the Forms Logo File ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Desktop Process&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All MASTER forms are set to use the generic logo file names listed below.  Saving the customer&amp;#039;s logo in the Adjutant folder with the correct name will automatically pull to each form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Replace the default logo files with customer logo files.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Save the customer logo in the Adjutant folder as three files:&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_SM.BMP (small logo that should not be scaled up)&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_MD.BMP (default logo, average size/quality that should scale well on most forms)&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_LG.BMP (large logo, only used for custom forms with large logo)&lt;br /&gt;
****	The existing files with these names can be deleted or renamed.&lt;br /&gt;
**	After changing the logo files, you will need to exit and log back in to see any updates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjutant 20/20 Process&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email the company logo file to Development so they can place the file in the /images folder on the customer&amp;#039;s web server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Generally, the file name should be &amp;#039;&amp;#039;reportlogo.png&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, but there may be execptions.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete the MASTER CID records ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MASTER CID can be deleted at any time after the steps above are complete, but &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; be deleted before customers begin accessing the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAKE ABSOLUTELY SURE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you are in the right RDP and Environment before proceeding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions in this screen rely on a special DBF file named CIDFLIST.DBF that should exist in the root Adjutant folder. The CIDFLIST DBF file contains the up-to-date datatables that are processed/checked/updated during the various functions for this screen. Since new database tables are added from time to time, it is best practice to obtain an updated CIDFLIST.DBF file before using this screen for any customer data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From the new CID, run Delete/Change CID, set the CID to MASTER and select ‘Delete CID’ then Process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Delete CID.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a series of warnings. If you are in the correct environment, proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
*Once that completes, run the ‘Remove Orphan Data’ option and Process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Verify the Licensed User Counts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review the License Status screen for the new CID and confirm that the values in the License column match the number of licensed users on the contract. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Desktop Login screen, the License Status screen, or the License Update screen still show &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Registered To: MASTERCID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, send a request to Development to update the license file for the new CID. Do not update any license counts until the CID shows as registered to the correct customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the counts do not match the customer&amp;#039;s contracted license counts, update them to match the contract. If any changes are made to the license counts, email your supervisor and copy Karen Egan with details on the changes you made.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LicenseStatus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are any discrepancies, notify your supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Continue to the System Manager Setup Guide ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, the CID should be basically functional, and you can continue with setting up remaining CID Maintenance items and other applications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=System_Manager_Setup_Guide &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup Guides]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=MASTER_CID_Copy_Guide&amp;diff=5960</id>
		<title>MASTER CID Copy Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=MASTER_CID_Copy_Guide&amp;diff=5960"/>
		<updated>2026-02-03T22:50:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This guide covers the initial CID creation and basic CID Maintenance update process when creating a new CID using a MASTER CID as a template.  This guide also covers the additional steps needed to update related system elements after a MASTER CID copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not a complete guide for System Manager setup. The System Manager Setup Guide should be followed to complete setting up a new CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Submit Request to Development ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Open a ticket (Install Adjutant Desktop) to Development to copy the MASTER CID database to the new customer server location.  Include all necessary details and instructions for any special circumstances.  Send an email with additional information (and copy all team members) if it is too much to fit into the ticket comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create the &amp;#039;6.4.4 Install Adj 2020&amp;#039; task on the 1st of the month after the Needs Analysis is complete because when that task is completed it fires a route to start recurring monthly invoices for licensing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verify the CID is Accessible and Create a Shortcut ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the ticket is complete, there should be a folder on the server named for the new customer*, with an RDP Desktop shortcut to the new installation. If there is no shortcut available, navigate to the customers folder in the RDP C:\ drive.  From the Adjutant sub-folder in the customer’s folder, create a shortcut to the ‘AdjLoaderV9.exe’ file. Copy that shortcut to the RDP Desktop and rename it accordingly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; For Non-Hosted installations, the Adjutant folder will generally be under an ‘Apps’ folder on one of the server resources. There should still be a C:\ drive location. Confirm with Development which network location the Adjutant software is installed under. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; If you create the shortcut from the C:\ drive location, you don’t get the security warnings that you get if the shortcut points to the network drive location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create the New CID Record==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From CID Maintenance, Add the CID details for the new customer. The ‘CID’ value sets the CID name. Saving the record will prompt a ‘Copy Settings From’ screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will not be able to fill in the MASTER ENT value until after you create the new CID and the new MASTER ENT record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the following records in the ‘Copy Settings from’ screen and press ‘Copy’. A series of processes will run to create the new CID. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do not interrupt these processes.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; It usually only takes a minute for hosted customers.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Fiscal Calendar&lt;br /&gt;
**	System Rules&lt;br /&gt;
**	CID Defaults and Setup Options&lt;br /&gt;
**	User Security Tokens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Copy CID.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Exit Adjutant and log back in to access the newly created CID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the CSTRING.TXT File ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Locate the CSTRING.TXT file in the Adjutant folder and edit the CID name to match your new CID. This file determines which security method (New vs. Old) is used, among other things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CSTRING.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create the Master ENT Organization ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*At the top right of the screen, select the new CID in the CID drop down. &lt;br /&gt;
*Create an Organization for the new company. Match the Organization ID to the CID. Assign the following attributes:&lt;br /&gt;
**	Bill To / Ship To / Sold To&lt;br /&gt;
**	Inventory Owner&lt;br /&gt;
**	Remit To / Sold From&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Complete the Initial CID Basic Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the following setup items in CID Maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Update Master ENT ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Update the &amp;#039;Master ENT&amp;#039; value in CID Maintenance to the newly created Org ID from the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set the GL Mask ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	The GL Mask in the CID Maintenance - Accounts tab must be updated via SQL with the following QRY&lt;br /&gt;
**	Update CID set GLMASK = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;X-XXXX-XX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; where CID = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  (Set the GL Mask to the desired format using X and – characters. Replace ‘&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;’ with actual CID)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Complete the GL Accounts / Warehouse / Held For Setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to proceed with the next steps, you must add at least one GL account and a default Warehouse.  Ideally, you should import the full chart of accounts at this step. However, If the complete chart of accounts is not available at this point, you can use a temporary GL account that will have to be replaced later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Once you have a chart of accounts, or at least one active GL account, add the default Warehouse record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The default Warehouse name should match the CID name. In most cases, the ‘Default Location’, ‘Active’, and ‘Production Plant’ checkboxes should be checked. You must complete the blank GL accounts in the ‘Account’ tab in order to save the record.  The add process will create a new Organization with a ‘Warehouse Location’ attribute. &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Do not check the &amp;quot;Distribution Whse&amp;#039; box unless you know how it is used. It will prevent the Warehouse from being used in Order Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Warehouse1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Warehouse2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Update the ‘Item Held For Codes (HOLDER) Rule Maintenance record to replace the entry for MASTER with the new customer name and vendor number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Unwanted Fiscal Calendar Header Records (FISCALH)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data copied from MASTER will have many years of fiscal calendar details that clients do not need loaded. These fiscal calendars are copied in the first step to create the new CID. They can either be deleted before that first step, or any time after the new CID is created. The fiscal calendars must be deleted via SQL and should be reviewed carefully before deciding which years will be needed for the customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review the calendars that exist in the FISCALH SQL table. Fiscal Calendar header records are saved by CID and Fiscal Year. Delete any KEYNO records in this table that will not be needed for the new customer. A good rule of thumb is that you can delete all but the current and prior year in the new CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The FISCALD SQL table contains the individual months/periods for each KEYNO listed in the FISCALH table. These records can be left in place and should not affect anything once the FISCALH KEYNO value is deleted.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the DROPFOLDERS Rule ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DROPFOLDERS rule will have the file path from the MASTER CID. Each rule detail record will need to be updated with the correct file path for the new installation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;All file paths should be entered with the full UNC path.  Certain Inbox reader functions require the UNC path, rather than just the drive letter and folder structure.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the procedure outlined below (or perform 30 individual edits to paste the right path prefix into each rule detail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	In SQL, run the following query to show the RHYKEYNO and the rule details associate with the DROPFOLDERS rule for the new CID. Replace the AAAA value in the query with the new CID name.&lt;br /&gt;
**      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select rhkeyno, keyno, text2 from rd where rhkeyno in (select keyno from rh where name = &amp;#039;dropfolders&amp;#039; and cid = &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       All rule detail records from the SQL query above should have the same same RHEYNO value, which is the keyno value of the DROPFOLDERS rule header record that you will need to replace in the next query.&lt;br /&gt;
*       All rule detail records should have &amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039; in the TEXT2 field in front of the &amp;#039;\DROPFOLDERS\ . . .&amp;#039; path details.  This is the base file path that you will need to replace in the next query. You will also need the new UNC file path that will replace the MASTER base file path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       In SQL, run the query below to perform a find/replace on the file path in the TEXT2 field. Replace &amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039; with &amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039; from the query above. Replace &amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039; with the new CID&amp;#039;s base file path. Replace the &amp;#039;####&amp;#039; RHKEYNO value with the RHKEYNO shown from the query above. The single quotes around &amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039; are part of the query format and must be there.&lt;br /&gt;
**      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Update rd set text2 = replace(text2,&amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039;,&amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039;) where rhkeyno = ####&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***     An example query would look like - Update rd set text2 = replace(text2,&amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039;,&amp;#039;\\SERVER1234-APP\APPS\ADJ\STEELMAX&amp;#039;) where rhkeyno = 2999&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       You can re-run the first query above to confirm that the replace worked as expected. If there are any issues, adjust the second query as needed to replace the base/new file path text with the desired details. You can test that the DROPFOLDERS path is working by trying to access the Document Vault from an Adjutant organization record and checking the &amp;#039;Open in Root Folder&amp;#039; button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fix the ABIS _ADMIN record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hard-coded _ADMIN (or BACKDOOR) security record relies on a Contact record in the primary CID that has a USERID of &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039;.  In order for this record to work properly, it needs to either be repointed to a Contact record in the new CID, or it needs to be recreated entirely. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE - DO NOT set the Active User flag for the ABIS _ADMIN record. By design, the _ADMIN user should not use a customer license. Flagging the Active User field will prevent the _ADMIN user record from working and will exhibit all types of problematic behavior until you clear the Active User flag.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Option 1 – Point the existing ‘_ADMIN’ record from the copied MASTER CID to a new Contact record that you create in the new CID (retains all security overrides from MASTER)&lt;br /&gt;
**	Add an ‘Abis Admin’ Contact record and add the ‘User in Adjutant’ attribute, but click on the X to close the User in Adjutant screen without saving it.&lt;br /&gt;
***     Set the &amp;#039;Email Address&amp;#039; value to your abiscorp.com address. This will be used throughout the implementation for the from address on system emails.&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, look up the Contact record you just added for &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; and make a note of the CONTID in the VCONTACT table.&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, find the KEYNO value for the existing &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039; Userid in the USERID table. This is the record that needs to get updated in the next step to link to the new &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; Contact record. &lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, run the QRY below and replace the CONTID value with the CONTID for the &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; record that you got from the VCONATCT table, and replace the KEYNO with the KEYNO from the &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039; Userid record in previous step:&lt;br /&gt;
***	update userid set contid = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;#####&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; where keyno = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;###&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**	Exit Adjutant and log back in, and clicking on the Contact button should display your Abis Admin contact.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Edit the User in Adjutant record to set the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default CID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default WHSE values&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for you new CID.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Also in the User in Adjutant record, remove the SMTP settings or reset them to use the customer&amp;#039;s email settings. &lt;br /&gt;
***     The abiscorp.com email settings should not be left in place or copied to other user records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Option 2 – Delete the ‘_ADMIN’ UserID and recreate it&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, delete the entire USERID table (it should only contain _ADMIN and any test records from the MASTER CID at this point)&lt;br /&gt;
**	Add an ‘Abis Admin’ contact record and assign the ‘User in Adjutant’ attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Set the UserID to ‘_ADMIN’ and set the Password to ‘XXXX’ (the password doesn’t matter, it is set elsewhere).&lt;br /&gt;
**	Clear the ‘Active User’ flag and any other ‘Named User’ flags. Set the default CID and WHSE fields, as well as any other settings appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Also in the User in Adjutant record, remove the SMTP settings or reset them to use the customer&amp;#039;s email settings. &lt;br /&gt;
***     The abiscorp.com email settings should not be left in place or copied to other user records.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Exit Adjutant and log back in, and clicking on the Contact button should display your Abis Admin contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fix Nite Inventory Emails and Overall Email Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory vs GL Dump Accounts (INVDUMP)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; rule copied from MASTER contains an email setting that either needs to be updated or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
** Update the MASTER SysAdmin&amp;#039;s email setting (currently fdonovan@abiscorp.com) to your email address to get the &amp;#039;Night GL vs Inv Summary&amp;#039; reports to your email. This can be changed to the customer&amp;#039;s email as the implementation progresses.&lt;br /&gt;
** Alternatively, delete the rule detail for the email setting. This will prevent anyone from receiving the nightly email. This can be added back with a customer email address later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Update the email setting (text2) in the AUTOBATCH rule to either remove fdonovan@abiscorp.com or update it to a customer or Strategist email address. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that the &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; Contact record is set with your abiscorp.com email address (or a designated team member on the implementation) for the duration of the implementation. The email linked to the _ADMIN Contact record is used as the from address for several system emails. This can be set to the customer&amp;#039;s email address for a Systems Administrator once they are in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The poptext.txt and inboxtext.txt files that were copied from MASTER still have abiscorp.com settings and passwords. These should either to be set to the customer&amp;#039;s desired email server settings, or they should be fixed so that emails are not being accidentally routed through abiscorp servers inappropriately. &lt;br /&gt;
** Copies of these files named &amp;#039;poptext - copy&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;inboxtext - copy&amp;#039; should exist in the copied Adjutant folder. The text in these files has been updated to replace all of the abiscorp settings and passwords. These files can be renamed or their data can be copied and pasted to the respective poptext and inboxtext files until the customer provides the correct email settings for their system. &lt;br /&gt;
**Alternatively, you can adjust any references in the poptext and inboxtext file that refer to abiscorp.com, as well as any password text so that the settings will not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Once these email settings are updated, use the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Server Tools&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; utility to restart ALL running services for the new CID. The services pull the system email settings from the _ADMIN Contact at startup, so they must be restarted to pull any changes made to the _ADMIN record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Move Email Templates to the New CID &amp;amp; Update ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email Templates are currently not copied in the CID Copy process. They should all exist in the EMAILSETTING SQL table under the MASTER CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Run the following SQL QRY to ‘move’ the MASTER Email Templates to the new CID where &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039; is the new CID:&lt;br /&gt;
**	&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;update emailsetting set CID = &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039; where CID = &amp;#039;MASTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** Note that there are database entries for MASTER and JONESCO. The above query should prevent duplicate template records from getting created for the multiple CIDs in MASTER data. &lt;br /&gt;
*Review and update the Email Templates Subject lines and update these to the new customer&amp;#039;s name. Replace references to MASTER CID with the customer in all templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update Form and Report Filenames With the New CID ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MASTER customized forms and reports should all exist under the Adjutant main folder with ‘MASTER’ in the form name.  These will need to be renamed in order to default as the Default Custom form in each application&amp;#039;s Message Control screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Option 1 - Use PowerShell to replace the CID (MASTER) value on all file names===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Launch Windows PowerShell from the RDP Start menu.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Type &amp;#039;X:&amp;#039; (where X is the root drive letter of the Adjutant folder on the RDP server) and hit Enter to access the root folder. Or you can use &amp;#039;CD\&amp;#039; and hit Enter. &lt;br /&gt;
*Change to the desired CID&amp;#039;s Adjutant directory, one folder at a time with the &amp;#039;CD XXXX&amp;#039; command. If PowerShell lets you change directly to a subfolder, can&amp;#039;t figure it out. &lt;br /&gt;
**Type &amp;#039;CD CID&amp;#039; then Enter (Replace CID with your customer&amp;#039;s CID folder name, or first-level folder name)&lt;br /&gt;
**Type &amp;#039;CD ADJUTANT&amp;#039; then Enter (If they are using something other than &amp;#039;ADJUTANT&amp;#039; as their main folder, replace with their main folder name)&lt;br /&gt;
**For example, to access the live Adjutant folder in &amp;#039;X:\Resource\Apps\LiveAdj\&amp;#039;, you would do that in 3 steps - &amp;#039;CD RESOURCE&amp;#039;, then &amp;#039;CD APPS&amp;#039;, then &amp;#039;CD LIVEADJ&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**The &amp;#039;DIR&amp;#039; command will list all folders and files in the selected directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy the expression below and paste into the PowerShell cursor to rename all FRX files. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMPORTANT - replace the text &amp;#039;newcid&amp;#039; with your customer&amp;#039;s CID name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Get-ChildItem -Filter &amp;quot;*master*.frx&amp;quot; | Rename-Item -NewName {$_.name -replace &amp;#039;master&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;NEWCID&amp;#039;}&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy the expression below and paste into the PowerShell cursor to rename all FRT files. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMPORTANT - replace the text &amp;#039;newcid&amp;#039; with your customer&amp;#039;s CID name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Get-ChildItem -Filter &amp;quot;*master*.frt&amp;quot; | Rename-Item -NewName {$_.name -replace &amp;#039;master&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;NEWCID&amp;#039;}&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type &amp;#039;EXIT&amp;#039; and then Enter to close PowerShell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Option 2 - Use File Explorer to individually replace the CID (MASTER) value in each file name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The FRT/FRX filenames can be renamed in File Explorer to replace ‘MASTER’ with the new CID name. &lt;br /&gt;
**      Set the view mode to detail, and set the search options to exclude subfolders.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Navigate to the customer&amp;#039;s Adjutant folder.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Use the folder search tool and search for *MASTER.FR* to return a list of all files with MASTER in the file name. There may be more than just form files here.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Highlight each file, then single-click on the file name to edit the file name. Replace MASTER with the new CID. Do not change any other file name details. TIP – the arrow keys and TAB key will navigate you through each file and keep you in edit mode. &lt;br /&gt;
**	These do not all have to be changed at this time. They can be updated as setup proceeds in each module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenameFile2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the Forms Logo File ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Desktop Process&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All MASTER forms are set to use the generic logo file names listed below.  Saving the customer&amp;#039;s logo in the Adjutant folder with the correct name will automatically pull to each form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Replace the default logo files with customer logo files.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Save the customer logo in the Adjutant folder as three files:&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_SM.BMP (small logo that should not be scaled up)&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_MD.BMP (default logo, average size/quality that should scale well on most forms)&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_LG.BMP (large logo, only used for custom forms with large logo)&lt;br /&gt;
****	The existing files with these names can be deleted or renamed.&lt;br /&gt;
**	After changing the logo files, you will need to exit and log back in to see any updates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjutant 20/20 Process&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email the company logo file to Development so they can place the file in the /images folder on the customer&amp;#039;s web server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Generally, the file name should be &amp;#039;&amp;#039;reportlogo.png&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, but there may be execptions.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete the MASTER CID records ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MASTER CID can be deleted at any time after the steps above are complete, but &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; be deleted before customers begin accessing the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAKE ABSOLUTELY SURE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you are in the right RDP and Environment before proceeding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions in this screen rely on a special DBF file named CIDFLIST.DBF that should exist in the root Adjutant folder. The CIDFLIST DBF file contains the up-to-date datatables that are processed/checked/updated during the various functions for this screen. Since new database tables are added from time to time, it is best practice to obtain an updated CIDFLIST.DBF file before using this screen for any customer data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From the new CID, run Delete/Change CID, set the CID to MASTER and select ‘Delete CID’ then Process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Delete CID.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a series of warnings. If you are in the correct environment, proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
*Once that completes, run the ‘Remove Orphan Data’ option and Process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Verify the Licensed User Counts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review the License Status screen for the new CID and confirm that the values in the License column match the number of licensed users on the contract. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Desktop Login screen, the License Status screen, or the License Update screen still show &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Registered To: MASTERCID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, send a request to Development to update the license file for the new CID. Do not update any license counts until the CID shows as registered to the correct customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the counts do not match the customer&amp;#039;s contracted license counts, update them to match the contract. If any changes are made to the license counts, email your supervisor and copy Karen Egan with details on the changes you made.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LicenseStatus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are any discrepancies, notify your supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Continue to the System Manager Setup Guide ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, the CID should be basically functional, and you can continue with setting up remaining CID Maintenance items and other applications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=System_Manager_Setup_Guide &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup Guides]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=MASTER_CID_Copy_Guide&amp;diff=5959</id>
		<title>MASTER CID Copy Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=MASTER_CID_Copy_Guide&amp;diff=5959"/>
		<updated>2026-02-03T22:48:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This guide covers the initial CID creation and basic CID Maintenance update process when creating a new CID using a MASTER CID as a template.  This guide also covers the additional steps needed to update related system elements after a MASTER CID copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not a complete guide for System Manager setup. The System Manager Setup Guide should be followed to complete setting up a new CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Submit Request to Development ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Open a ticket (Install Adjutant Desktop) to Development to copy the MASTER CID database to the new customer server location.  Include all necessary details and instructions for any special circumstances.  Send an email with additional information (and copy all team members) if it is too much to fit into the ticket comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create the &amp;#039;6.4.4 Install Adj 2020&amp;#039; task on the 1st of the month after the Needs Analysis is complete because when that task is completed it fires a route to start recurring monthly invoices for licensing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verify the CID is Accessible and Create a Shortcut ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the ticket is complete, there should be a folder on the server named for the new customer*, with an RDP Desktop shortcut to the new installation. If there is no shortcut available, navigate to the customers folder in the RDP C:\ drive.  From the Adjutant sub-folder in the customer’s folder, create a shortcut to the ‘AdjLoaderV9.exe’ file. Copy that shortcut to the RDP Desktop and rename it accordingly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; For Non-Hosted installations, the Adjutant folder will generally be under an ‘Apps’ folder on one of the server resources. There should still be a C:\ drive location. Confirm with Development which network location the Adjutant software is installed under. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; If you create the shortcut from the C:\ drive location, you don’t get the security warnings that you get if the shortcut points to the network drive location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create the New CID Record==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From CID Maintenance, Add the CID details for the new customer. The ‘CID’ value sets the CID name. Saving the record will prompt a ‘Copy Settings From’ screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will not be able to fill in the MASTER ENT value until after you create the new CID and the new MASTER ENT record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the following records in the ‘Copy Settings from’ screen and press ‘Copy’. A series of processes will run to create the new CID. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do not interrupt these processes.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; It usually only takes a minute for hosted customers.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Fiscal Calendar&lt;br /&gt;
**	System Rules&lt;br /&gt;
**	CID Defaults and Setup Options&lt;br /&gt;
**	User Security Tokens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Copy CID.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Exit Adjutant and log back in to access the newly created CID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the CSTRING.TXT File ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Locate the CSTRING.TXT file in the Adjutant folder and edit the CID name to match your new CID. This file determines which security method (New vs. Old) is used, among other things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CSTRING.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create the Master ENT Organization ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create an Organization for the new company. Match the Organization ID to the CID. Assign the following attributes:&lt;br /&gt;
**	Bill To / Ship To / Sold To&lt;br /&gt;
**	Inventory Owner&lt;br /&gt;
**	Remit To / Sold From&lt;br /&gt;
*In SQL, update the CID for this Organization to match the new CID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Complete the Initial CID Basic Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the following setup items in CID Maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Update Master ENT ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Update the &amp;#039;Master ENT&amp;#039; value in CID Maintenance to the newly created Org ID from the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set the GL Mask ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	The GL Mask in the CID Maintenance - Accounts tab must be updated via SQL with the following QRY&lt;br /&gt;
**	Update CID set GLMASK = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;X-XXXX-XX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; where CID = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  (Set the GL Mask to the desired format using X and – characters. Replace ‘&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;’ with actual CID)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Complete the GL Accounts / Warehouse / Held For Setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to proceed with the next steps, you must add at least one GL account and a default Warehouse.  Ideally, you should import the full chart of accounts at this step. However, If the complete chart of accounts is not available at this point, you can use a temporary GL account that will have to be replaced later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Once you have a chart of accounts, or at least one active GL account, add the default Warehouse record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The default Warehouse name should match the CID name. In most cases, the ‘Default Location’, ‘Active’, and ‘Production Plant’ checkboxes should be checked. You must complete the blank GL accounts in the ‘Account’ tab in order to save the record.  The add process will create a new Organization with a ‘Warehouse Location’ attribute. &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Do not check the &amp;quot;Distribution Whse&amp;#039; box unless you know how it is used. It will prevent the Warehouse from being used in Order Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Warehouse1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Warehouse2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Update the ‘Item Held For Codes (HOLDER) Rule Maintenance record to replace the entry for MASTER with the new customer name and vendor number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Unwanted Fiscal Calendar Header Records (FISCALH)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data copied from MASTER will have many years of fiscal calendar details that clients do not need loaded. These fiscal calendars are copied in the first step to create the new CID. They can either be deleted before that first step, or any time after the new CID is created. The fiscal calendars must be deleted via SQL and should be reviewed carefully before deciding which years will be needed for the customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review the calendars that exist in the FISCALH SQL table. Fiscal Calendar header records are saved by CID and Fiscal Year. Delete any KEYNO records in this table that will not be needed for the new customer. A good rule of thumb is that you can delete all but the current and prior year in the new CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The FISCALD SQL table contains the individual months/periods for each KEYNO listed in the FISCALH table. These records can be left in place and should not affect anything once the FISCALH KEYNO value is deleted.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the DROPFOLDERS Rule ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DROPFOLDERS rule will have the file path from the MASTER CID. Each rule detail record will need to be updated with the correct file path for the new installation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;All file paths should be entered with the full UNC path.  Certain Inbox reader functions require the UNC path, rather than just the drive letter and folder structure.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the procedure outlined below (or perform 30 individual edits to paste the right path prefix into each rule detail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	In SQL, run the following query to show the RHYKEYNO and the rule details associate with the DROPFOLDERS rule for the new CID. Replace the AAAA value in the query with the new CID name.&lt;br /&gt;
**      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select rhkeyno, keyno, text2 from rd where rhkeyno in (select keyno from rh where name = &amp;#039;dropfolders&amp;#039; and cid = &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039;)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       All rule detail records from the SQL query above should have the same same RHEYNO value, which is the keyno value of the DROPFOLDERS rule header record that you will need to replace in the next query.&lt;br /&gt;
*       All rule detail records should have &amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039; in the TEXT2 field in front of the &amp;#039;\DROPFOLDERS\ . . .&amp;#039; path details.  This is the base file path that you will need to replace in the next query. You will also need the new UNC file path that will replace the MASTER base file path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       In SQL, run the query below to perform a find/replace on the file path in the TEXT2 field. Replace &amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039; with &amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039; from the query above. Replace &amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039; with the new CID&amp;#039;s base file path. Replace the &amp;#039;####&amp;#039; RHKEYNO value with the RHKEYNO shown from the query above. The single quotes around &amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039; are part of the query format and must be there.&lt;br /&gt;
**      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Update rd set text2 = replace(text2,&amp;#039;master file path&amp;#039;,&amp;#039;new file path&amp;#039;) where rhkeyno = ####&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
***     An example query would look like - Update rd set text2 = replace(text2,&amp;#039;\\948121-APP01\ABIS\MASTER&amp;#039;,&amp;#039;\\SERVER1234-APP\APPS\ADJ\STEELMAX&amp;#039;) where rhkeyno = 2999&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*       You can re-run the first query above to confirm that the replace worked as expected. If there are any issues, adjust the second query as needed to replace the base/new file path text with the desired details. You can test that the DROPFOLDERS path is working by trying to access the Document Vault from an Adjutant organization record and checking the &amp;#039;Open in Root Folder&amp;#039; button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fix the ABIS _ADMIN record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hard-coded _ADMIN (or BACKDOOR) security record relies on a Contact record in the primary CID that has a USERID of &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039;.  In order for this record to work properly, it needs to either be repointed to a Contact record in the new CID, or it needs to be recreated entirely. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE - DO NOT set the Active User flag for the ABIS _ADMIN record. By design, the _ADMIN user should not use a customer license. Flagging the Active User field will prevent the _ADMIN user record from working and will exhibit all types of problematic behavior until you clear the Active User flag.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Option 1 – Point the existing ‘_ADMIN’ record from the copied MASTER CID to a new Contact record that you create in the new CID (retains all security overrides from MASTER)&lt;br /&gt;
**	Add an ‘Abis Admin’ Contact record and add the ‘User in Adjutant’ attribute, but click on the X to close the User in Adjutant screen without saving it.&lt;br /&gt;
***     Set the &amp;#039;Email Address&amp;#039; value to your abiscorp.com address. This will be used throughout the implementation for the from address on system emails.&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, look up the Contact record you just added for &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; and make a note of the CONTID in the VCONTACT table.&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, find the KEYNO value for the existing &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039; Userid in the USERID table. This is the record that needs to get updated in the next step to link to the new &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; Contact record. &lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, run the QRY below and replace the CONTID value with the CONTID for the &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; record that you got from the VCONATCT table, and replace the KEYNO with the KEYNO from the &amp;#039;_ADMIN&amp;#039; Userid record in previous step:&lt;br /&gt;
***	update userid set contid = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;#####&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; where keyno = &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;###&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**	Exit Adjutant and log back in, and clicking on the Contact button should display your Abis Admin contact.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Edit the User in Adjutant record to set the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default CID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default WHSE values&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for you new CID.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Also in the User in Adjutant record, remove the SMTP settings or reset them to use the customer&amp;#039;s email settings. &lt;br /&gt;
***     The abiscorp.com email settings should not be left in place or copied to other user records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Option 2 – Delete the ‘_ADMIN’ UserID and recreate it&lt;br /&gt;
**	In SQL, delete the entire USERID table (it should only contain _ADMIN and any test records from the MASTER CID at this point)&lt;br /&gt;
**	Add an ‘Abis Admin’ contact record and assign the ‘User in Adjutant’ attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Set the UserID to ‘_ADMIN’ and set the Password to ‘XXXX’ (the password doesn’t matter, it is set elsewhere).&lt;br /&gt;
**	Clear the ‘Active User’ flag and any other ‘Named User’ flags. Set the default CID and WHSE fields, as well as any other settings appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Also in the User in Adjutant record, remove the SMTP settings or reset them to use the customer&amp;#039;s email settings. &lt;br /&gt;
***     The abiscorp.com email settings should not be left in place or copied to other user records.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Exit Adjutant and log back in, and clicking on the Contact button should display your Abis Admin contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fix Nite Inventory Emails and Overall Email Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory vs GL Dump Accounts (INVDUMP)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; rule copied from MASTER contains an email setting that either needs to be updated or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
** Update the MASTER SysAdmin&amp;#039;s email setting (currently fdonovan@abiscorp.com) to your email address to get the &amp;#039;Night GL vs Inv Summary&amp;#039; reports to your email. This can be changed to the customer&amp;#039;s email as the implementation progresses.&lt;br /&gt;
** Alternatively, delete the rule detail for the email setting. This will prevent anyone from receiving the nightly email. This can be added back with a customer email address later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Update the email setting (text2) in the AUTOBATCH rule to either remove fdonovan@abiscorp.com or update it to a customer or Strategist email address. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that the &amp;#039;Abis Admin&amp;#039; Contact record is set with your abiscorp.com email address (or a designated team member on the implementation) for the duration of the implementation. The email linked to the _ADMIN Contact record is used as the from address for several system emails. This can be set to the customer&amp;#039;s email address for a Systems Administrator once they are in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The poptext.txt and inboxtext.txt files that were copied from MASTER still have abiscorp.com settings and passwords. These should either to be set to the customer&amp;#039;s desired email server settings, or they should be fixed so that emails are not being accidentally routed through abiscorp servers inappropriately. &lt;br /&gt;
** Copies of these files named &amp;#039;poptext - copy&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;inboxtext - copy&amp;#039; should exist in the copied Adjutant folder. The text in these files has been updated to replace all of the abiscorp settings and passwords. These files can be renamed or their data can be copied and pasted to the respective poptext and inboxtext files until the customer provides the correct email settings for their system. &lt;br /&gt;
**Alternatively, you can adjust any references in the poptext and inboxtext file that refer to abiscorp.com, as well as any password text so that the settings will not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Once these email settings are updated, use the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Server Tools&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; utility to restart ALL running services for the new CID. The services pull the system email settings from the _ADMIN Contact at startup, so they must be restarted to pull any changes made to the _ADMIN record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Move Email Templates to the New CID &amp;amp; Update ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email Templates are currently not copied in the CID Copy process. They should all exist in the EMAILSETTING SQL table under the MASTER CID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Run the following SQL QRY to ‘move’ the MASTER Email Templates to the new CID where &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039; is the new CID:&lt;br /&gt;
**	&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;update emailsetting set CID = &amp;#039;AAAA&amp;#039; where CID = &amp;#039;MASTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** Note that there are database entries for MASTER and JONESCO. The above query should prevent duplicate template records from getting created for the multiple CIDs in MASTER data. &lt;br /&gt;
*Review and update the Email Templates Subject lines and update these to the new customer&amp;#039;s name. Replace references to MASTER CID with the customer in all templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update Form and Report Filenames With the New CID ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MASTER customized forms and reports should all exist under the Adjutant main folder with ‘MASTER’ in the form name.  These will need to be renamed in order to default as the Default Custom form in each application&amp;#039;s Message Control screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Option 1 - Use PowerShell to replace the CID (MASTER) value on all file names===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Launch Windows PowerShell from the RDP Start menu.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Type &amp;#039;X:&amp;#039; (where X is the root drive letter of the Adjutant folder on the RDP server) and hit Enter to access the root folder. Or you can use &amp;#039;CD\&amp;#039; and hit Enter. &lt;br /&gt;
*Change to the desired CID&amp;#039;s Adjutant directory, one folder at a time with the &amp;#039;CD XXXX&amp;#039; command. If PowerShell lets you change directly to a subfolder, can&amp;#039;t figure it out. &lt;br /&gt;
**Type &amp;#039;CD CID&amp;#039; then Enter (Replace CID with your customer&amp;#039;s CID folder name, or first-level folder name)&lt;br /&gt;
**Type &amp;#039;CD ADJUTANT&amp;#039; then Enter (If they are using something other than &amp;#039;ADJUTANT&amp;#039; as their main folder, replace with their main folder name)&lt;br /&gt;
**For example, to access the live Adjutant folder in &amp;#039;X:\Resource\Apps\LiveAdj\&amp;#039;, you would do that in 3 steps - &amp;#039;CD RESOURCE&amp;#039;, then &amp;#039;CD APPS&amp;#039;, then &amp;#039;CD LIVEADJ&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**The &amp;#039;DIR&amp;#039; command will list all folders and files in the selected directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy the expression below and paste into the PowerShell cursor to rename all FRX files. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMPORTANT - replace the text &amp;#039;newcid&amp;#039; with your customer&amp;#039;s CID name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Get-ChildItem -Filter &amp;quot;*master*.frx&amp;quot; | Rename-Item -NewName {$_.name -replace &amp;#039;master&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;NEWCID&amp;#039;}&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy the expression below and paste into the PowerShell cursor to rename all FRT files. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMPORTANT - replace the text &amp;#039;newcid&amp;#039; with your customer&amp;#039;s CID name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Get-ChildItem -Filter &amp;quot;*master*.frt&amp;quot; | Rename-Item -NewName {$_.name -replace &amp;#039;master&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;NEWCID&amp;#039;}&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type &amp;#039;EXIT&amp;#039; and then Enter to close PowerShell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Option 2 - Use File Explorer to individually replace the CID (MASTER) value in each file name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The FRT/FRX filenames can be renamed in File Explorer to replace ‘MASTER’ with the new CID name. &lt;br /&gt;
**      Set the view mode to detail, and set the search options to exclude subfolders.&lt;br /&gt;
**      Navigate to the customer&amp;#039;s Adjutant folder.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Use the folder search tool and search for *MASTER.FR* to return a list of all files with MASTER in the file name. There may be more than just form files here.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Highlight each file, then single-click on the file name to edit the file name. Replace MASTER with the new CID. Do not change any other file name details. TIP – the arrow keys and TAB key will navigate you through each file and keep you in edit mode. &lt;br /&gt;
**	These do not all have to be changed at this time. They can be updated as setup proceeds in each module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenameFile2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update the Forms Logo File ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Desktop Process&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All MASTER forms are set to use the generic logo file names listed below.  Saving the customer&amp;#039;s logo in the Adjutant folder with the correct name will automatically pull to each form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Replace the default logo files with customer logo files.&lt;br /&gt;
**	Save the customer logo in the Adjutant folder as three files:&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_SM.BMP (small logo that should not be scaled up)&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_MD.BMP (default logo, average size/quality that should scale well on most forms)&lt;br /&gt;
***	LOGO_LG.BMP (large logo, only used for custom forms with large logo)&lt;br /&gt;
****	The existing files with these names can be deleted or renamed.&lt;br /&gt;
**	After changing the logo files, you will need to exit and log back in to see any updates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjutant 20/20 Process&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email the company logo file to Development so they can place the file in the /images folder on the customer&amp;#039;s web server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Generally, the file name should be &amp;#039;&amp;#039;reportlogo.png&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, but there may be execptions.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete the MASTER CID records ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MASTER CID can be deleted at any time after the steps above are complete, but &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; be deleted before customers begin accessing the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MAKE ABSOLUTELY SURE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you are in the right RDP and Environment before proceeding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions in this screen rely on a special DBF file named CIDFLIST.DBF that should exist in the root Adjutant folder. The CIDFLIST DBF file contains the up-to-date datatables that are processed/checked/updated during the various functions for this screen. Since new database tables are added from time to time, it is best practice to obtain an updated CIDFLIST.DBF file before using this screen for any customer data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From the new CID, run Delete/Change CID, set the CID to MASTER and select ‘Delete CID’ then Process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Delete CID.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a series of warnings. If you are in the correct environment, proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
*Once that completes, run the ‘Remove Orphan Data’ option and Process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Verify the Licensed User Counts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review the License Status screen for the new CID and confirm that the values in the License column match the number of licensed users on the contract. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Desktop Login screen, the License Status screen, or the License Update screen still show &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Registered To: MASTERCID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, send a request to Development to update the license file for the new CID. Do not update any license counts until the CID shows as registered to the correct customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the counts do not match the customer&amp;#039;s contracted license counts, update them to match the contract. If any changes are made to the license counts, email your supervisor and copy Karen Egan with details on the changes you made.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LicenseStatus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are any discrepancies, notify your supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Continue to the System Manager Setup Guide ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, the CID should be basically functional, and you can continue with setting up remaining CID Maintenance items and other applications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=System_Manager_Setup_Guide &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup Guides]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Non_Stock_Non_Shipped_Report&amp;diff=5958</id>
		<title>Non Stock Non Shipped Report</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Non_Stock_Non_Shipped_Report&amp;diff=5958"/>
		<updated>2026-01-29T16:37:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reports &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; invnonstock&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;20/20 URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; /Reports/NonStockNotShippedReport_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The purpose of this report is to provide a list of non stock items that have not been shipped.  The screen has a second, Results tab which allows for edits to the report lines from a grid view.  The screen will default in report mode which generates a detail or summary listing as shown below.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non Stock Report Highlight.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non Stock Report Results.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Output button will display the results in a grid view.  This Results tab is interactive when run in Detail mode and allows you to select the rows to add the document to the non stock not shipped report kill list rule (which removes the line from the report) and simultaneously make a GL adjustment to credit the non stock GL account and debit the extended cost of each selected line to the account selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Selected column is how you choose the rows to adjust and the Adjustment Date may be overwritten from the current date to reflect the GL period and year for the GL adjustment.  The GL accounts available in the drop-down are managed in the Maintain &amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt; GL Accounts screen and show any account marked as an &amp;quot;IC Adjustment Account&amp;quot;.  The Selected Total in the bottom right of the Results tab will sum the extended cost of the selected rows.  The kill list entries and GL adjustments made are unique by row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non Stock Report Grid.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;Exclude Known Good&amp;#039; checkbox will remove items from the report which have been shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non-Stock_Note_Shipped_Exclude_Known_Good.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;Skip Adjustments&amp;#039; checkbox can be used to adjust the selected items from the Non Stock Not Shipped results permanently without creating any General Ledger details. This option should only be used when you are absolutely certain that the correct accounting adjustments have already been made manually to account for the non stock value of the selected items. Adjustment transactions are logged to a system table, but it requires support from ABIS to query the tables for transaction detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warning Note: Extreme care should be taken to ensure that the right people have security access to this screen, and that personnel understand the impact of bypassing General Ledger posting for non stock adjustments.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To bypass creating accounting details for the selected items, check the &amp;#039;Skip Adjustments&amp;#039; box. Any entries in the &amp;#039;Adjustment Acct&amp;#039; field will be ignored. A warning will display that &amp;#039;Accounting Adjustments Must be Made Manually&amp;#039;. Once you are certain that you are ready to proceed, click the &amp;#039;Update&amp;#039; button and answer &amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039; to the prompt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non Stock Skip Adjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Item Control]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Non_Stock_Non_Shipped_Report&amp;diff=5957</id>
		<title>Non Stock Non Shipped Report</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Non_Stock_Non_Shipped_Report&amp;diff=5957"/>
		<updated>2026-01-29T16:01:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reports &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; invnonstock&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;20/20 URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; /Reports/NonStockNotShippedReport_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The purpose of this report is to provide a list of non stock items that have not been shipped.  The screen has a second, Results tab which allows for edits to the report lines from a grid view.  The screen will default in report mode which generates a detail or summary listing as shown below.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non Stock Report Highlight.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non Stock Report Results.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Output button will display the results in a grid view.  This Results tab is interactive when run in Detail mode and allows you to select the rows to add the document to the non stock not shipped report kill list rule (which removes the line from the report) and simultaneously make a GL adjustment to credit the non stock GL account and debit the extended cost of each selected line to the account selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Selected column is how you choose the rows to adjust and the Adjustment Date may be overwritten from the current date to reflect the GL period and year for the GL adjustment.  The GL accounts available in the drop-down are managed in the Maintain &amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt; GL Accounts screen and show any account marked as an &amp;quot;IC Adjustment Account&amp;quot;.  The Selected Total in the bottom right of the Results tab will sum the extended cost of the selected rows.  The kill list entries and GL adjustments made are unique by row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non Stock Report Grid.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Options===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;Exclude Known Good&amp;#039; checkbox will remove items from the report which have been shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non-Stock_Note_Shipped_Exclude_Known_Good.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;Skip Adjustments&amp;#039; checkbox can be used to adjust the selected items from the Non Stock Not Shipped results permanently without creating any General Ledger details. This option should only be used when you are absolutely certain that the correct accounting adjustments have already been made manually to account for the non stock value of the selected items. Adjustment transactions are logged to a system table, but it requires support from ABIS to query the tables for transaction detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warning Note: Extreme care should be taken to ensure that the right people have security access to this screen, and that personnel understand the impact of bypassing General Ledger posting for non stock adjustments.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To bypass creating accounting details for the selected items, check the &amp;#039;Skip Adjustments&amp;#039; box. Any entries in the &amp;#039;Adjustment Acct&amp;#039; field will be ignored. A warning will display that &amp;#039;Accounting Adjustments Must be Made Manually&amp;#039;. Once you are certain that you are ready to proceed, click the &amp;#039;Update&amp;#039; button and answer &amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039; to the prompt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Non Stock Skip Adjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Item Control]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Non-Stock_Note_Shipped_Exclude_Known_Good.png&amp;diff=5956</id>
		<title>File:Non-Stock Note Shipped Exclude Known Good.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Non-Stock_Note_Shipped_Exclude_Known_Good.png&amp;diff=5956"/>
		<updated>2026-01-29T15:45:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=HOW_TO_-_Send_Out_Text_Message_Updates_for_a_Sales_Order&amp;diff=5955</id>
		<title>HOW TO - Send Out Text Message Updates for a Sales Order</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=HOW_TO_-_Send_Out_Text_Message_Updates_for_a_Sales_Order&amp;diff=5955"/>
		<updated>2026-01-05T21:09:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to send out text message updates for a sales order==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a contact attribute (SMSUPDATE) will allow customers (contacts) to receive text messages at the following stages of a Sales Order&amp;#039;s life cycle:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*Items are sent to production (S2P button on the sales order)&lt;br /&gt;
*Items are produced (PWO is complete)&lt;br /&gt;
*Shipping Event has a status of &amp;quot;Shipped&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Shipping Event is marked as &amp;quot;Delivered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1) Fill out the text message address for contacts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first step is to fill out the contact&amp;#039;s &amp;#039;Email 2&amp;#039; with their phone number in the format of an email address.  Please note all carriers have different formats for sending text messages through email, so you&amp;#039;ll need to determine the customer&amp;#039;s cell phone provider as well.  As of January 2026, this function is no longer supported by AT&amp;amp;T, Verizon and T-Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AT&amp;amp;T:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  10digitphonenumber@txt.att.net (XXXXXXXXXX@txt.att.net)&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Verizon:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  10digitphonenumber@vtext.com (XXXXXXXXXX@vtext.com)&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sprint:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  10digitphonenumber@messaging.sprintpcs.com (XXXXXXXXXX@messaging.sprintpcs.com)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;T-Mobile:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; 10digitphonenumber@tmomail.net (XXXXXXXXXX@tmomail.net)&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2) Assign the contact attribute&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, attach the contact attribute SMSUPDATE to any contact wanting to receive text updates.  If this contact attribute doesn&amp;#039;t exist on your system, please contact us for help. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3) Create templates for your text messages&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since these text messages are being sent via email, you need to create the following entries in the Email Templates screen in Adjutant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: SMS_Email_Template_Scren.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Template Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMS S2P - sent when the items are sent to production;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMS PWOCOMP - sent when the PWO is completed;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMS SESHIP - sent when the Shipping Event is shipped;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMS SEDEL - sent when the Shipping Event is delivered; &lt;br /&gt;
      &lt;br /&gt;
If you need help setting any of this up, please contact us at support@abiscorp.com. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;4) Determine a process for opting in and option out of text messages&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You&amp;#039;ll need to figure out a way to get the word out to your customers on how to enroll in text message updates.  Additionally, you&amp;#039;ll need to communicate how they should contact you to opt out of receiving text message updates.  If someone doesn&amp;#039;t want to receive text messages anymore, remove the SMSUPDATE attribute and the email 2 entry from their contact record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Process==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the setup is complete, any contact with the SMSUPDATE attribute will receive updates provided that:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The contact is: 1) linked to the organization on the sales order; 2) associated with a valid text message address; and 3) updated to contain the SMSUPDATE attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: SMSUPDATE_Contact_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;#039;SMS Update&amp;#039; checkbox is selected on the sales order.  (This will be selected automatically if a contact with the SMSUPDATE attribute is selected.):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: SMSUPDATE_Sales_Order_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can verify sent text messages by running the Email Log Report in Adjutant.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Question: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Is there a way to limit text messages so they only go out to the Contact listed on the sales order?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Answer: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Yes.  This can be done by activating the SMSONLYONE setup option.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Order Entry]] [[Category: Production]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Master_-_Attributes&amp;diff=5954</id>
		<title>Item Master - Attributes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Master_-_Attributes&amp;diff=5954"/>
		<updated>2025-12-31T16:58:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Master&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item Attributes are maintained in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Rule Maintenance]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; screen under Item Attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Item_Master_Attribute.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fields/Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Asset:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want an asset to be created in the Asset Information screen every time you receive the item.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An item with this attribute must be a stock item and serialized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOM (Bill of Material):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item contains a bill of material.  The Bill of Material Master window will open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUYINQB (Force to Buy in QB):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute will force the item to the Purchase module of Quick Buy, even if marked as produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUYOUTCONFIG:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute can be put on an item that&amp;#039;s on the BOM of a configurable part.  This will order the BOM item (the one with the BUYCONFIG attribute) when the user selects the &amp;#039;PO&amp;#039; button from a sales order containing the configurable part.  The raw materials from the BOM will be combined on the PO (one line per item).  This is meant to work with items that are stocked in the same way they are configured (driven by the controlling quantity on the configuration screen).  So if the item on the BOM is controlled by the Length question, the raw material is meant to have a stocking unit of FT.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COA (Certificate of Analysis):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This attribute is intended for hazardous materials.  When this attribute is added to a lot-controlled item, it adds a jump screen to each lot (accessible by clicking on a lot in the #Lot tab of Item Master) that holds specific information about that lot.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Coil Lot&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Activates a jump screen to Coil Defaults when attribute is saved. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Coil Defaults&amp;#039;&amp;#039; screen is used to catagorize in detail the specifics of each coil type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CW (Catch-Unit Item):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item has a catch unit associated with it, must be a stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do Not Update BCost on Receipt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the base cost of the item to remain fixed, no matter what price the item is received at.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Freight Type Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item to be flagged as a freight item on any sales order or invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOCKSOCPRICE (Lock Config Price):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute locks in the configuration price for the item and does not allow any edits to the configurable pricing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify, Base:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is a base for modifications, must be a stock item. This attribute is required to modify the item in the Modification Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify, Add-in:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is an add-in for modifications on the base items. This attribute is required to modify the item in the Modification Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPWOASSLABEL (No Label on Assembly):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute to suppress production labels from being printed when item is produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Labels (PONOLABEL):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you do not want any barcode labels to be printed when the item is received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Packing Type Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item to be flagged as a packing item on any sales order or invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POGROUP###:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This attribute - where &amp;#039;###&amp;#039; is a number - can place items on separate purchase orders when they are ordered at the same time.  For example items with &amp;#039;PO Group 001&amp;#039; will be placed on the first generated PO and items with &amp;#039;PO Group 002&amp;#039; will be on a second purchase order.  The name (text 1) on the Item Attributes rule follows the format of &amp;#039;POGROUP###&amp;#039; where ### denotes the number.  For example, POGROUP001. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRICEMATRIX:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Allows users to use thePrice Matrix Screen to price the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODLABELQTY:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Prints one production label per qty to make on the production work order.  For example, if the PWO is for 20 of an item, then this attribute will print 20 labels.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWO2PO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Used for buyouts of produced items.  This attribute will force an item on the BOM of a sales order line to a PO from the sales order.  For example, let&amp;#039;s say there is an item called PRODBEAM that goes to the shop for production.  On the BOM of that PRODBEAM item is a buyout called BUYOUTBEAM.  If you add PRODBEAM to a sales order then select the PO button from the sales order screen, the BUYOUTBEAM will display in the Create Purchase Order screen.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOWARN:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Suppress the message for specific items during the S2P process that warns the user that some items cannot be produced with current stock levels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQLINKPO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will not allow an item to be shipped on a sales order unless it has been linked to a purchase order and that purchase order has been properly received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWMOD:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will display Modification Processor when this item is added to a Purchase Order.  For more information refer to the [Processing-PO|Processing PO] page.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SO Use Required&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; During SO line entry the Use field must be filled out before you can save the line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOC (Sales Order Configurator Setup):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is configurable.  The Product Configurator will allow the user to set up the possible configurations of the item, should not be a stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOISLOTNO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This can be added to lot controlled items so that the lot number that is assigned during the PO receipt is the same as the linked sales order.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWI:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute contains the jump screen (AMSPROD) and will flag the system to push data to SWI machines (to be used with the SWI setup option and rule. Contact your consultant for more information on integration setup with SWI).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPBCOST:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item&amp;#039;s base cost to be updated when a PO is received with a price higher than the current base cost.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPBCOSTBOTH:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute will update the item&amp;#039;s base cost when a PO is received.  The difference between this and the UPBCOST attribute is the UPBCOST attribute will only adjust it if the PO receipt cost is higher than the current base cost.  The UPBCOSTBOTH attribute will also adjust the item&amp;#039;s base cost if the last received cost is lower than the current base cost.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use System Flag for BCost Update:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this attribute if you want the default system setting to decide the base cost update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Item Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=CID_Setup_Options&amp;diff=5950</id>
		<title>CID Setup Options</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=CID_Setup_Options&amp;diff=5950"/>
		<updated>2025-08-15T21:55:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Info==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CID Setup Options determine how Adjutant operates.  They are maintained in the [[ Company ID Maintenance |Company ID (CID) Maintenance]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They may also be changed through [[Screen Setup Options | Screen Setup Options]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup Options and Definitions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;45BOMCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require users to enter 1 or 3 when asked to continue to use raw material that is not on a BOM. If setup option 45BOMCHK is set and scanned coil is not on BOM, show confirm message with 3 = continue and anything else loops back to scan PWO line.       &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;45CALCCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, system will compare qty to assemble vs qty open, and close line if &amp;gt;=.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46BOMCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require users to enter 1(y) or 2(n) when asked to continue to use raw material that is not on a BOM. If setup option 46BOMCHK is set and scanned coil is not on BOM, show confirm message with 3 = continue and anything else loops back to scan PWO line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46REQFULL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then require 100% assignment of required BOM items before allowing assembly.  Works in Prompts 45 and 46.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46USEMAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - During last step of prompt 46, when qty to use &amp;gt; qty on hand, the total qty on hand will be used when Enter or yes is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46SCRAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow entry of scrap after processing items made from coil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46SINGLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prompt users to enter footage used on scanner after each line is completed. If enabled, process each pwo scan thru process (assume + entered each time)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;48LABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will print coil/coil-like tags for items assembled using Prompt 48.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;74ALLOCMATCH &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Validates loaded coil through 74/79 against SO Allocations and prevents loading if the lot# for the scanned P# is not already allocated to the SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;74CHKPWONS &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents user from packing a non-stock production item using prompt 74 that has not been marked as produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;79LOCATION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds a prompt after scan outer carton to ask for carton location (prompt 79).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;79LOCKSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the carton is locked to SO of the first item added to it (unable to add items from different SO). Only checked at the SO# line/ P# level. Loading cartons into cartons is not changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;79NOTINSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, users will be stopped and will need to select &amp;#039;3&amp;#039; to continue after they scan a carton onto a shipping event when the linked sales order isn&amp;#039;t on the shipping event.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;79SHOWOPEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If set then show open carton/line count during 79 processing. If count = 0, then show All Items Packed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;86MOVE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the logic for Prompt 86 so that it will only move a quantity of one at a time instead of the whole Production Work Order line. This option also updates the display in Prompt 86 to show the line&amp;#039;s Piece Mark and current quantity in the new station after a successful scan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ACCTMGRBYORG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled display account manager from parent company only. Otherwise, display all contacts with account manager attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ACCTMGRREQONENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - AcctMgrReqOnEnt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADDDATETOPROJOPPNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ADDDATETOPROJOPPNO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADDSUSPECT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, suspect screen is launched after save of new Org, adding suspect attribute to new Org. NOTE: Orgs created from other screens will not auto populate a suspect attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADDTODROPS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add 1 to all drops with higher drop by 1 on change of drop number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJ2.0&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ADJ2.0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adjutant Accounts Payable module is installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adjutant Accounts Receivable module is installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJCCREQ1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires an address and zip code to be entered before processing a credit card transaction.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJCCUSETOKEN &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows users to save an encrypted token instead of the full credit card data. Users must process a charge from the hand entered or swiped number. Once a charge is processed, the token will be received and saved to the customer. The token will be used in all future transactions for that credit card. The token is provided by Heartland Credit Card Processor and is only compatible with Heartland integration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adjutant General Ledger module is installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Not in Use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJTRANSACTION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ADJTRANSACTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AGEBYDUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, agings are by due date, with new current column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLAPPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ALLAPPR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLOWOVERLAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the schedule conflict message received when assigning/scheduling a task that will overlap with an existing scheduled task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLOWTASKQUOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds a &amp;quot;Quote&amp;quot; checkbox to task header.  If task is marked as quote, the material/labor items added to timesheet are not removed from inventory.  The quote can be converted to a live task by selecting a convert button.  During the conversion process, a list of items will display so the user can select which ones to bring over to the live task.  The selected items are removed from inventory and assigned to the task.  The unselected ones are deleted from the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLRES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Post time to any resource on the Time and Material Entry screen (no assignments necessary).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALTPRINTBOX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Toggle between Getprinter and Printer Prompt type report form calls when enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALTPROBCODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to edit the description of the Standard Task used in the Task Entry Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Integration with an AMS roll former controller (Eclipse Software) is being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSADDCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then coil will be adjusted into the system to meet AMS demand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSADDSEIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically creates an Interplant Shipping Event during the assembly process from Connex usage if the Production Work Order (PWO) is an Interplant PWO and an Interplant Shipping Event doesn&amp;#039;t exist. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSANYCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allows Adjutant to accept and use whatever coil is scanned through AMS regardless of prod plant/whse on the sales order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBLANKIDQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Runs a query to fill out blank item_id values before the Adjamsprocess program converts the AMS usage data into Adjutant usage data. This query tries to match the usage data from AMS back to the original lines that were sent to AMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBLANKITEMID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This option is used in AMS integration. If set,  will apply the usage of a line without an Item ID in the AMS Product table to the line with the last valid item ID. This is used to account for additional material run outside of a job sent by Adjutant against the most recent job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBUNDLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - AMSBUNDLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBUNDLE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, move data from bundlecode to bundlecode2 in amsproduce table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBUNDLESET2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to change layout of AMSBUNDLE user fields. Change layout of user fields to match new format (Pass Customer PO# to Eclipse in the User1 field, and pass the Job# to Eclipse).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSINC2D&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will take the final scrap coil signal from Connex (Type = 2, Reason = D) and zero out the used coil. This option will only work with the AMSBLANKITEMID option turned on. Scrapped coil usage will be applied to the last job that came in for that coil. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSORDERSQL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Directs OrderIN, BundleI, and coilin into the correct SQL tables instead of files. Eclipse will have to updated to read from these SQL datatables instead of the .del files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSPUNCHISP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use RCODE = P as leading punch question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSSCRAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, changes AMS process when running reclaim.  Works with setup of AMSSCRAP rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSUSEMACHNUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to copy machine number to AMS_ORDERIN table during AMS process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSUSER2PROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change values in orderin.del file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSUSER5CUSTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change to use profile profile instead of ams profile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSUSER5SPEC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Insert Answers to configurable questions with rep code F and ST into user 5 field of AMS_ORDERIN table to allow visibilty on Eclipse software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AP20CHKNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create new check number and manual check number fields in apchkacct table (16 characters).  Use as check number fields if AP20CHKNO setup option is enabled. Change screens to use 15 char numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APAGEPOLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add POs linked to AP Invoice to polist field in cursor.  Only works in detail mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APAPRPPAYZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes 0 show up in grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCCVENDOR2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, AP Credit Card Vendors must use the APCCVENDOR Org Attribute, rather than the CCDATA attribute. The CCDATA attribute becomes exclusive for personal credit card data for sales. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCHECK48&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows 48 invoices on a check without printing an overflow stub.  To use, APCHKOVERFLOW rule must be setup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Text1 = Overflow message  (lc_overflowmessage)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Num1 = Number of checks on stub  (48)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log1 = Enabled (checked)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log2 = Print details.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If checked, and stub has &amp;gt;48 invocies, first 48 will print on stub, if not checked, stub will not have any details, just message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCHKPOCLEAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Show a warning during AP Invoice entry if the PO Clearing account is used as a distribution line and the AP Invoice is not linked to a PO.           &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCHKVALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will then void all checks not used between first entered Check number and final used check number that are not live checks when the process completes in the event of a Check reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCHKVENDORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then print checks in company order instead of vendno order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APDUPREFNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set check for duplicate ref# (checkno) on apnoncheck payment screen.  Warn if duplicate found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APEDITCTRLACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows edit of Control account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APEDITDDD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows edit of due date and discount date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APKEEPDISTNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will copy down line notes for distributions on an AP Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APMULTI1099&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to manage multiple 1099 types per single vendor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APOVERAPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the AP Approved to Pay amount to be set higher than the AP Invoice balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPAPPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sends email to all people with pending approvals. Runs every 30 mins, 6am to 7pm M-F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPRAPREMITTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Generates separate approvals for both the Sold From and Remit To organization on AP invoices - provided the organizations have separate approvals set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPREMAILDEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Controls sending of emails through the approval screen. Enable to be able to decline in approval screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPREMAILOK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Controls sending of emails through the approval screen. Enable to be able to approve in approval screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPRPOREMITTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Generates separate approvals for both the Sold From and Remit To organization on purchase orders - provided the organizations have separate approvals set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APREMITACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create setup option APREMITACCT to get Ctrl and Def accounts from RemitTO vendor instead of master vendor. Update and clear buttons changed to update remitto vendor if option set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APRETNOTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Make retainage use pretax numbers to figure retainage can only be used when POSPLITTAX is enabled also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APSEGACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables a new dynamic AP Distribution account selector interface during AP entry. Users can select GL Account segments from a drop-down during the Add Distribution prompt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APSKIPABACHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - APSKIPABACHECK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APTOEXP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add Billable Check box to AP Dist tab,  create EXP material lines for lines marked as billable, and linked to projects. Use APTOEXP CID setup option to enable Billable Checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APTOSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When the &amp;quot;billable&amp;quot; box is checked and the line is saved, pop up a window that allows the user to add the amount as a line item to a service order or sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APTWOBALLINES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - APTWOBALLINES&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARAGINGDBEXP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Fields added to cursor in summary mode. Data is dumped to ADJ_DB_EXPORT.xls in Adj Root folder if ARAGINGDBEXP cid option is set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARCREDITDISC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Calculates available discounts on invoices when applying a credit in the Apply Credits screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARFULLDISC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows the full discount offered in the Cash Receipt screen, regardless of what the paid amount is. Discount is calculated on balance if set, not paid amt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARNODEFPOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Leaves the Post Mark Date blank (does not default to today when tabbed through).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARPASTDUEATTACH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, will automatically attach the outstanding invoices to the email when from the AR Past Due Email screen. This will only work when Auto-Process (Single Report per Customer) is selected. The attached documents will be sent to the AR Contact. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARSTATECR1ST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Alter the Customer Statement report to allow the Invoices to be sorted by the grouping with negative balances first and then positive balances. Will flag credits with sorter1 = &amp;#039;x&amp;#039;, this will move them up in the sort order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARSTATEDELOCR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the &amp;quot;Exclude Credits&amp;quot; checkbox to only exclude Open Credit invoices. Other types of negative invoices, such as credits made from material returns, will still show up on the Statement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARSTATESKIPDEP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will exclude deposit payment records from AR Statement report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASAUTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will make AR Statement auto processing use ASAUTO- attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASCFLAGBUNDLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Updates Adjamsprocess to check asc_prodout.bndleprint to determine when to print bundle tags. A value of &amp;#039;y&amp;#039; will trigger the print command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASCPRINTCTAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Updates the auto bundle tag printing logic to also print carton tags when printing bundle tags.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASKALERT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ASKALERT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASKCARTCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Asks the user how many copies of a carton tag to print during the carton creation process in Prompt 74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASKEDITNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to edit the Invoice Header note in the Approve/Edit Billing and Ship SO screens after creating the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ATCHECKCYCLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks to see if the item being transferred/adjusted is currently being counted (not yet committed) in the same warehouse. If found, a message will display that the item is being counted and cannot be transferred or adjusted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AVAILRED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets available quantuty to be and red if enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOAPPLYCC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Apply CC credits to matching invoices during superbatch processing.  CC screen changed to save SO Keyno into CCLINK field.  Function looks for CCLINKS matching the current invoice, and applies them if found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOBATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow Batch processing to be scheduled on autosch screen.  Setup rule to control which processes are ran  (Gen Batch, Print Inv, Post Batch). Change superbatch, printinv and postbatch to run without prompts when called from auto processing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOIGNORELOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will ignore any shipping locks in place on sales orders when the nightly batch process runs to apply open credits against sales orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOPACKALSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, attaches the invoice packing list as well as documents in the invoice document vault to the email when Auto-Processing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOPROMANY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then all of the AUTO-tags can be used, so documents can print, email, and fax if all three are enabled on org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOQUICKCART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically creates a carton with settings from QUICKCARTON whenever a shipping event is created. If AUTOQUICKCART is enabled, make default QuickCart when SE is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOTRANSSET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, Interplant production bundles will be automatically transferred to the linked Customer Shipping Event when the Interplant truck is unloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===B===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BACKUPALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Control backup of VouchList folder. BackupALL backup files on each refresh)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BACKUPONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Control backup of VouchList folder. Backup files when screen is loaded,don&amp;#039;t backup after each reload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECBANKASOF &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the bank balance from changing for transactions cleared in dates beyond the As Of date when running Bank Reconciliation in As Of mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECBPURGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds a button that will allow the user to purge selected (cleared) items in bank reconciliation. The new button allows records to be purged at user convenience, rather than at the same time of clearing. This new Turning on this option will hide the &amp;quot;Purge Cleared&amp;quot; checkbox that purges and clears at the same time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECDUMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - To save keyno, type and amount of all checks, cashrec and adjs once a day when bankrec is loaded.  This data can be used to find the source of the floating book and bank balance issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECNEWBOOK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to switch between old and new book and bank logic (BANKRECNEWBOOK), default is old logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECNOSORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option will sort the detailed Bank Rec Report by however the Check/Deposit/Adjustment grid is sorted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKCRECPOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will use the Post Date of Journal Entries as the transaction date in bank reconciliation instead of the add date of the journal entry when transactions are &amp;quot;Added to Bank Rec&amp;quot; from the journal entry screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECPURGEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will flag cleared items to never appear in bank rec screen again. Setup option sets checkbox, which sets PURGEC = &amp;#039;y&amp;#039; in tables. PurgeC records are not loaded into grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECUPERGEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will flag cleared items to never appear in bank rec screen again. Setup option sets checkbox, which sets purgec = &amp;#039;y&amp;#039; in tables. PurgeC records are not loaded into grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BCCAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables logic that references the [[BCC AR Email | BCC AR Email]] rule to automatically BCC the specified email address when AR Invoices or Customer Statements are emailed from Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BCCSELF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Blind Carbon Copies the user on all emails sent out of Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BGAUTOJC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically generates the matching WIP entries for Job Cost when an Invoicing batch is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BGAUTOSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically generates the matching WIP entries for Sales Orders when an Invoicing batch is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BGAUTOSVR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically generates the matching WIP entries for Tasks (service orders) when an Invoicing batch is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BGREQPROJID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a Project ID to be entered before any shipped sales orders that are linked to a project can be invoiced. Only one Project may be invoiced at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BIGLOGO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays CID Logo in Full Screen mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BILLINGNOTESREADONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - BILLINGNOTESREADONLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BLANKESTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Set the matching date to blank if set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BLANKREQDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Set the matching date to blank if set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLBYCARRIER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled split up BOLs by shipto/carrier.  If SE already has a linked FPO (pomast.sekyno), then fill out FPO PO number on new BOL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLBYCARTON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, make 1 BOL per top level carton. Flag Bol with carton (limits auto generation to 1 per carton).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLCHECKCOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and cod amount &amp;gt;0, then Cashier or Company Check must be selected to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLCONTPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change source of contact to Def Contact of Organization, or Default Contact of Project if BOLCONTPROJ is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLCONTSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and SO has a contact that has a phone number, then that contact will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLFROMSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Loads all line item descriptions and line item weights into Bill of Lading detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLLOCKDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the Bill of Lading date from being edited once the BOL has been saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLLOCKPHASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Phase field on the BOL becomes locked to just phases of linked tasks (no free text).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLSTKFROMSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Loads stock line items from SO into BOL detail. Functionality is same as BOLFROMSO, but only loads stock items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLTPONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Bill To address is only changed when &amp;quot;Third Party&amp;quot; Freight Terms are used. Without this option, &amp;quot;COLLECT&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;COD&amp;quot; are also included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLWARNIFCLOSED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add warning if Master SO is closed when BOL is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOM5DEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Input Mask on the qty fields to 99,999,999.99999, instead of based on Item DecQty fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOMWARNDUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Warns user during adding an item to a BOM if item is already on selected BOM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BS2GROUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, add new Group filter checkbox list to the Bill Cycle Billing Statement screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUNBYITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes the Connex Bundling use the &amp;quot;Bundle by Item&amp;quot; option by default rather than the &amp;quot;Bundle by Piece Mark&amp;quot; option&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUYOUTCONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled will order the input items from the BOM, provided the configurable item (the one with the BOM attribute) has the BUYCONFIG item attribute.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===C===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CALCDRIVETIME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically calculates driving distance from the Sales Order warehouse to the Ship To address per driving directions from Yahoo. Enabling this option will slow down order entry for new Ship To locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CALCSHIPSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to enter freight and packing charges during the Sales Order shipping process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHRECINVSTAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the invoice status from the cash receipt customer&amp;#039;s soldto default SOTYPE defined invoice status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHRECSORTDD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the sort of the Cash Receipt screen to be by Due Date, oldest to newest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHREQNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CASHREQNOTE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHSKIPREF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows you to leave the Reference field blank when apply cash receipts in the Apply Cash Receipts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHSUMMARY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Allow printing of new Cash Summary report after cash receipt.  Report can be printed at any time if you know the cash key (cashrec.cashkey2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CATDBF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CATDBF&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCALLOWCANCEL &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows users to cancel chip card reader transactions while processing from Adjutant. If disabled, user must cancel processing transactions from the chip reader device.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCAPPROVE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to not block save of SO if using approvals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCBINSORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled handles 99.99.xxx bins special (left pads 99 blocks to two chars each to make number sorts work correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCFILLBANKDEP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will automatically fill out the Bank Deposit field when taking a Credit Card POS payment with a card type identifier (VI = Visa, MC = Mastercard, DC = Discover, AE = Amex) followed by the last 4 digits of the card number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCNITEINV2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to generate niteinv2 records after commits complete.  Records made for each item/loctid committed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCNODISCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Correct issue with batch out of balance if  fields not tabbed thru, and discount is used. If set, do not calc discount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCOUNTCHNGWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CCOUNTCHNGWHSE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCOUNTNEWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and increasing count of item, get cost from SI Tier if Serial/Lot, else OHF Avg, else ItemMaster.Avg. If no cost can be found, don&amp;#039;t allow commit for that item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCOUNTWHSECHNG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Without setup option, scanner will flag scans in otherwhse as invalid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCTESTCARD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays a &amp;quot;Test Card&amp;quot; button on the Point of Sales (POS) screen when testing Heartland transactions. The Test Card button fills in dummy card data to allow you to process practice CC payments in the POS screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CFLASTUSED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Fills out the new &amp;#039;Last Used&amp;#039; column on the Coil Finder screen.  This date indicates the last time the coil was either assigned/unassigned to a Production Work Order, or shipped out on a Sales Order. If the setup option is disabled, the column will be blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CFSHOWTOTAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to show total band, default is off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHANGEDISCACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables pop-up window on AP Invoice and Cash Receipt screen to allow user to change default discount given/taken GL account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKCP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change Quickbuy to handle AddToQB records that are not linked to SOTran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKORDERINC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - For PO screen, and if enabled, force the OrdQty to be multiple of the the OHF orderinc value.  Only check if OrderInc is &amp;lt;&amp;gt; 0, and if the PO qty is in stk units.  If not a multiple, reset to nearest multiple and alert user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKOVERLAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, issues an alert that the contract dates overlap with an existing contract, but still allows users to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKPACKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Check entered qty vs system packqty. It Qty isnt a multiple, round to nearest multiple and notify user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKPROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then the profile from first item on the order where log6 in the dept rule is set is used as the master profile for the order, and a warning is shown each time an item is saved that has a profile that does not match the master. The change is made to both the RFQ and SO screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKQTYSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enable/disable check qty logic/nag box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKUNLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents a task from being unlocked if it is currently in billing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKWORKCAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add check for working calendar working days at least 60 days out at login if CHECKWORKCAL CID option enabled.  If no working days found, show messagebox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHKTSKPOLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check open linked po and if record found, hide the complete button and display the Open Linked PO message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHKTSKPOLNK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks for Linked Purchase Orders on Tasks and warns the user to receive and close the purchase order before completing the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHKZEROPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Notifies user if item has $0 price and SO line is submitted to production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CLEANSCRAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CLEANSCRAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CLEANWORKING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically deletes old files out of Adjutant&amp;#039;s &amp;quot;Working&amp;quot; folder once it is through with them. The working folder can be manually cleaned from within Adjutant by going to the Cleanup Temp Files screen (Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Cleanup Temp Files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CLEARPOMSN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Clears the Project ID and Phase fields on the Purchase Order for each new line item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COGSSPLIT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, then split FRT COGS into non frt item COGS accounts based on ratio of item wt to total wt. (assumes qty in lbs)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COGSSPLIT2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will reallocate frt cost back to other items COGS accounts by qty (lbs). Will also update new ppfrt fields in billtran and sotran with dollar amount reallocated. Disable COGSSPLIT1 if using COSGSPLIT2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILDROPMCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the mill coil will be used as the name of the drop folder instead of the adj lot number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILDROPPCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - COILDROPPCOIL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILLABELLOG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add print button to display coil screen to print a one-off tag. Printed when COILLABELLOG CID option is set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILLABELX2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, default the copies on CoilReceipt screen to 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILPROCESSLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, listbox is used for processor field. List comes from Orgs with PROCESSOR attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILPROD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, coils must have color and gauge filled out in profile table. PWOs are grouped by GAUGE and COLOR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILPROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds filters for Width, Color, Material, and Gauge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COLORBUTTONSPOG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - On Generate Purchase Order screen, if enabled, make the Skip button yellow, the Exit button red, and the Add to QB, Open PO, and Order buttons green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COLORBYDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Color codes tasks by Department instead of by Priority. The Department Color Picker (Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Task Management &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Dept Color Picker) may be used to determine the color coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMMNOPLAN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Coded that to check every time a record needs to be written if that person has a plan, if not do not write their record to the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMMSELLPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Commissions are based upon selling price; discounts from list are not factored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMMSOGRP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, selected SO Types will be accounted for when a Commission Plan is set up as &amp;quot;Earned On Invoice&amp;quot;. Without this option, SO Types are only checked when the plan is set up as &amp;quot;Earned On Order&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMPPRINTIMAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Look for a new custom version of the Completed Service Order Form (CSVRIMAGEORD instead of CSVRORD). This custom version of the form allows users to print attachments from the Doc Vault with the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEX6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Used in addition to SMART6 and SMART6USAGE, will take additional usage records sent over by recent versions of Connex (as Tcode = 6 records) and will apply the additional footage against the line it was run against. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXBUNDLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables bundling screen and logic with Connex integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXCOST6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will handle adjustments from Connex (tcode=6) just like a normal run.  This must be enabled for an adjustment (smartprod.tcode=6) to be able to complete production of a line and move the cost of the finished good to the sales order.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXCTAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables bundle tags with Connex integration. Labels print automatically once production is complete. Label printers are set to warehouse and machine in the AMSPRINTER rule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXC2TAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables carton tags with Connex integration. Labels print automatically once production is complete. Label printers are set to warehouse and machine in the AMSPRINTER rule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXNOSUBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will ignore subassembly lines in the Connex assembly process when assigning material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXPOSTSCRAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will treat additional usage coming from Connex as scrap on the assigned coil for any line that has already been completed in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONFUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - User ID defaults into the Confirm To field on the Purchase Order Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONSUMABLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires non-stock items to be linked to an SO before receipt. Enforces several layers of control to prevent using inventory GL accounts for consumable items. (See ECR 21847 for details)                                                                                            &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COPYATTRIBVAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and item is copied, all underlying tables will be copied also. Table list assroute, catalog, cwinfo, hazmat, profile, udq, wirerope, amsprod, bom, dotnote, varunit, itemstdcost&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COPYDOCVAULT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, copy the RFQ doc vault files over to the SO docvault. Create new function to copy subfolders and files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COPYRFQDOCVAULT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, ask to copy docvault files from copy source RFQ to new RFQ.  Ask during save process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTEQUIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Equipment on service orders (turns checkbox on in Batch Creator).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTHOU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - COSTHOU&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTHOUR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Hourly Labor on service orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTLABOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Labor on service orders (turns checkbox on in Batch Creator).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTMATERIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Material on service orders (turns checkbox on in Batch Creator).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTSALARY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Salary Labor on service orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CPARTBILLTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CPARTBILLTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CRALLACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CRALLACCT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CREATEUNPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Turns on the Create Unbilled PO Receipts option in the Batch Creator. This option should only be used if you are using a separate PO system in a 3rd Party accounting package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CREDITTOPLANT &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the Plant Location&amp;#039;s Cost/Revenue account segments based on the GL Group assigned to that location.  Any GL Group reflexes from the SO Type or the warehouse combined with item transaction categories (such as frozen digits, etc) will use the production plant to identify the warehouse GL group instead of the shipping location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CSOADDUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - when enabled will force any alerts created from a sales order to be sent out from the sales person on the order. The default without the setup option is the add user of the sales order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CUSTLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CUSTLABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CUSTOMPWO1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Created 2 forms from EXCEL samples. Created new Rule  PWOFORMS  (Text1 is DeptCode char(2), Text2  is report form name char(20).  Change PrintPWO logic to check this table.  If dept match is found, use new form.  Must have SINGLEPWO turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===D===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DATABLEND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Runs as part of the Automain process. When set, will dump the results of the Income Statement and Balance Sheet reports into two different tables once an hour. This is to be used specifically with the Datablend software package for General Ledger reporting. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DEFAULTLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Lot flag to checked on new inventory items in the Item Master.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DEFTOPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Message Control screen to Print instead of Preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DELRDPUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When the option is enabled, Adjutant will remember and connect the RDP user license to the Adjutant license. When removing the User in Adjutant license, a new prompt will ask the user to also remove the RDP license. This will save users from requesting the RDP removal manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DEPTPROD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new logic to S2P to break up PWO by Guage/Color.  Process logic by department based on log4 flag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DIARSCSV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then attach xls file as csv file to emails and file saves generated from report set logic for diamond screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DIAMONDNOLOCK &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will run diamond queries with READ UNCOMMITTED option enabled. This will allow users to reduce blocking or deadlocks when running large Diamond reports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DIRITEMDET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - DIRITEMDET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DISABLECOPYBILLNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, suppresses the popup &amp;quot;Save to Billing Notes?&amp;quot; in web Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DOCLIMITCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - System will check the Credit Limit on Bill To screen when entering new task or sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DOCLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Documents in document vault are stored as links (paths on workstation or network) instead of embedded into SQL database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DRCOUNTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables shipto to auto-assign to DRs based on county.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DUMPLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will dump out list of files in folder to z9... text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DUMPTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - (ABIS-ONLY) If set then dump out the tax detail by jurisdiction and line level tax data to XLS files in the working folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DVOPENPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will directly open PDF instead of previewing (same as double click)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DVTSLOCAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the copy docvault files to c:\temp folder before loading in viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===E===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ECOM-NOCOMMENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ecom-NOCOMMENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ECOM-NOIMAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ecom-NOIMAGE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ECOM-NOSOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ecom-NOSOC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EDITLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - EDITLINK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EDITPROJNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, then the project note can be edited from the grid. The project is updated on lost focus on the note field in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EDITSTKDESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to edit the description of a stock item on a Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EMAILERROR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically emails error messages in Adjutant to tech support email address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EMAILSELF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sends an email to a small woodland elf. Not really, it emails back to running user, or abistest@abiscorp.com if no running user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EMPPAYSPEC4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, adds 2 columns for Resid and Problem Code to the Resource Pay Hours Summary XLS report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT_COMPHACCTMGR_REQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ENT_COMPHACCTMGR_REQ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTCHKPHONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, checks the Organization Main Phone on any new Org during the add process and shows possible duplicates with a matched main phone number. This also checks the main phone for duplicates during the Add Ship To process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTCOUNTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, and the customer number is left blank on an add, the system uses the settings in the CUSTNO counter to generate the customer number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTHIDELOGO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ENTHIDELOGO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTHIDEZONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes the Zone field invisible on the Org screen when enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTOP1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows a warning if email is not filled out when adding a new customer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTREQ1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then require address1, city, state, zipcode and 10 digit phone number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTUSEPERSON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ENTUSEPERSON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EPSINGLEEMAIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Send a single email to multiple users instead of same email to each user (from auto-alert).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPENSENOBILL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, hide the &amp;quot;Billable&amp;quot; column on expense reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPGLGROUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Copy Exp Report Desc to AP Invocie Descrip. Add logic to use GL Groups from resource to change Exp accts if EXPGLGROUP setup option is enabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPORTAMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - EXPORTAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPORTSMART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - EXPORTSMART&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPRPTPOSTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use last date of exp report as invoice/post date if within CID posting window. If outside window, use today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXTMARGIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then launch new shared margin screen (between SO and RFQ)  Ask if pricing per lbs.  Based on answer show correct columns.  Pass new pricing info back into SO/RFQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===F===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FAXCOVER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically send a Fax Cover Sheet when sending faxes from Adjutant (via a fax server or an internet fax system such as efax or greenfax).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCBYPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change FC to generate by Custno/ProjID if FCBYPROJ setup option is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCEXCLPLAID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checkbox checked, then exclude all paid invoices from FC generation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCITEMINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - FCITEMINT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCNEWCOUNTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If set then, new FCINV counter will be used instead of base invoice counter. FCINV counter will be setup on first load of GENFC screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FILLBEAMSIZE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Added logic to MBSGRID to save the beam size to a configurable question named with beam size in description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FINDITEMMATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses &amp;quot;find near&amp;quot; logic when searching for items in Item Master, Sales Order, Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FIRSTLAST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled and in PEOPLE mode, make Company name Salutation + First + Last Name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FLATTENSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - FLATTENSER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FRACCPAC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - FRACCPAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FQTYPRI&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - On Purchase Orders, logic will use fqty to generate unit price even if purchase unit = costing unit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FTPLEPASSIVE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the label engine FTP process to work in passive mode.  This can be useful if active FTP ports are blocked in the customer environment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===G===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;G2EDITDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows users to edit the production department for Production Work Orders in the Production Scheduler grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GENBATCHPOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Asks user if they want to post new batches after generating batches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GETCAPS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - GETCAPS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GHOSTSCRIPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, GS checkbox  defaults to checked in Message Control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL,INTERCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - GL,INTERCOMP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL_MULTICID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - GL_MULTICID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLGENNEW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Runs one query per column in the financial report writer, then pulls row data out of the result set from this query.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLKEEPDISTNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will copy down line notes for distributions on a GL Journal Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLMAS500&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MAS 500 GL is being used. This setup option will also create a Journal Entry import file that may be imported to MAS 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLPOSTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - GLPOSTDATE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLRCURR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then default selected period and year to current GL period and year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLSHOWBOL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will populate BOLNO and SONO fields with BOL# and SO# from BOL Generated Freight POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GRPSHIPBYCPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Groups Invoices by Bill To + Cust PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GRPSHIPBYPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Groups Invoices by Project ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GRPSHIPBYSHIPTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Groups Invoices by Bill To + Ship To.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HASHPW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses new hashed password values (still in testing)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDECOLL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new security option to exclude collection notes from screen (type = &amp;quot;CL&amp;quot;) NOTES,COLLECTION (old) NOTES (S1-NEW).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDECOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hide Completed option on Schedule screen also hides the completed tasks for today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDEORG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then user needs NOTES, ORG, or NOTES-S2 (old/new) to see any org that they are not the AccMgr for (except for the master org).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDEOVERLAPCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - HIDEOVERLAPCHK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDEPROJONQUICKTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hides the Project section on QuickTask&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDEVENDOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Removes the Vendor Code/Name from the Inventory Labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIGHLITESTK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Highlights all of the stock items in the item list when searching for items in the Quote, Sales Order, Purchase Order, Bid PO and Item Master screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HISTORY1YEAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Controls fields on the SoldTo and BillTo screen to work off a rolling 12 month calendar rather than work off a 3 year history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HOLDINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option for the Skip Processing flag to prevent the invoice from being built in order to hold off invoicing until order has completely shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HOLDREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Marks all PO Receipts with the Hold flag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HOLDWIPLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables a new field for SO Line Link on the Material tab of Time Entry. This allows linking material lines on a task to a SO line. Format is XXXX:Y where XXXX is the SO Number and Y is the SO Line Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IAADJZEROLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allows adjusting inventory into a lot that has no qty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IAREQDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If found, require department to adjust inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ICNEWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change Scrap screen to use Cost Tiers if ICNEWCOST enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ICNSTIER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create cost tiers for Non-Stock items when they are either received on a Purchase Order, or assembled on a Production Work Order. The setup option also updates the shipping process to check for a cost tier to use when shipping Non-Stock items, and it adds a new &amp;quot;NS&amp;quot; option to the Cost Tier and Cost Tier Usage tabs of the Item Master screen to view the Non-Stock cost tiers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ICSEPBYOWNER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If CID option ICSEPBYOWNER is enabled, and item has MULTIOWNER attribute, then the cost by assembled part owner is captured in ITEMMOH,ITEMMOD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ICXFERAUTOLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This will assign a system-generated lot number when the &amp;#039;New&amp;#039; checkbox is selected on the Transfers &amp;amp; Adjustments screen.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IDFRAC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This displays two new fields in Modificaiton Process that allows entering ID1/ID2 as a fraction.  The fraction will be converted to a decimal once the line is processed.  This is for items with &amp;#039;Track Length&amp;#039; selected in Item Master.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IGNORECRM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add logic to show 4 box question screen (orig, credit, both, neither), then set ignorecrm flag based on questions. Add new ignorecrm field to billmast (y/n)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IGNOREDESKICON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppresses the make all icons visible message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IGNORELESSONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and count diff is less than one, then do not make any inventory changes.  NOT make adjustments to coil when adjusted amount is less than 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IGNOREROOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - IGNOREROOR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMITEMCAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require the Item Transaction Category in Item Master. The desired reflex is when adding a new item, ITEMCAT should be empty and require user to make an entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMDATE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the Material Planning tab of the Item Master screen from displaying dates if the demand line is linked to a phase without dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMNOPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows unscheduled demand (stock items for PWO&amp;#039;s not yet generated) on the Material Planning tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMNOZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to remove zero qty on hand lots from lot tab  (They appear if WIP Qty&amp;lt;&amp;gt;0 right now). If set, remove onhand = 0 lots from Lot Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMSPEC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set will display the paint code and the coat information from the coil receipt data on the @ tab and the coil allocation grid from the sales order line item entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INCFREIGHT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Display Freight as a Line Item on Sales Order and Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INCPACKING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Display Packing as a Line Item on Sales Order and Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INSERTMATDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inserts work date into material descriptions on timesheet material lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INSERTNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inserts work date and resource on timesheet invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVALTTERMS1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - INVALTTERMS1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVDATEBATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to assign invoice date on batch screen instead of on shipment screen. If found, use new invdate field as source of invoice dates. If not found, disable field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVNSWHSELATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This option updates the Non Stock Not Shipped Report Warehouse (WHSE) filter logic to better handle filtering transferred items that have been unloaded at the destination warehouse. This new option should be enabled for any customer that utilizes the interplant transfer features through the Shipping Events module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVORDER2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then sort by shipto + SO Header Keyno + line number  (puts items into SO order on invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVREMOVETS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, PO line items linked to a Task Time Entry will be removed from NSNS report. PO line items linked to a deleted Time Entry line will stay on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVSEARCHOCTG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - INVSEARCHOCTG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVSHOWTERMINFO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays the applicable discount amount if payment terms are met.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVSOABIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setup option allows printing the bin on invoice forms (expression on the form is &amp;#039;C_billtran.soabin&amp;#039;).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ITEMDETUPSRV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ITEMDETUPSRV&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ITEMEXACT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays item in item master when an exact match is entered, regardless if there are other items that may be a partial match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ITEMMULTINOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change note screen to have 5 notes (SO, RFQ, PO, PWO and Inv)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ITEMSPECCHAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allow expanded character set in item codes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===J===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;JUMPSTREET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks the &amp;quot;Street Match&amp;quot; box by default on the Record Finder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===L===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LABELDEFPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, print coil tags to user&amp;#039;s default printer. Skip Whse Coil tag printer logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LABELDIFF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - New screen to allows setup of custom Inventory labels for Custom/Item pairs.  Change InvLabel generation points to use custom label if found (LABELDIFF CID option enables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LABELEXTFTP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - LABELEXTFTP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LASERCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows printing of laser coil tag labels from PO Receipt screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LASERCOIL1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If this and LASERCOIL are on, only print 1 laser label for each coil (default is 2) from Coil Finder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LASTPAYONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Cash process to just use billmast.lastpaydate as date filter for payments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LASTTOUCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, show two new columns in the Earned tab:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Last Touch - Add date of the newest note for the same customer (rtnotes.entid) that has a note owner (rtnotes.owner) that is the same as the person earning the commission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*LT Aged Days - The number of days between the add date of the note and the date the commission was earned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LE_TS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Label Engine over TS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LEADIMPMATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses matching logic to allow user to select possible match on the Lead Importer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LEADUPCUSTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and custno in import file, matched import records will have custno updated with custno from file  (or unique varent if not unique custno)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LEAVESORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the bundle screen will retain the last button sort order, rather than defaulting back to bundle + line# sort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LIMITCARTON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables Top Level Carton security. If set, user must have security token TOPCART to create a top level carton. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LIMITTOOHF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If enabled, the item search results on the Sales Order, Quote, Purchase Order, and Vendor Bid screens will only include items that have an OHF record for the warehouse selected on the line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LIMITUPDATEONORG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - LIMITUPDATEONORG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LINKACCTBAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prints Payments/Credits and current Balance on Adjutant invoice. If set and Attach Link is clicked, all linked coil drop folder files will be attached to email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LINKCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Attach linked coil documents to invoices from Message Control via the &amp;#039;Attach Linked&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOCKCOSTONSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, cost cannot be changed from screen, or via BOM change once line has been shipped (qtyshp&amp;lt;&amp;gt;0). Add logic to PO screen to respect Lock Flag, if set and SO line has been shipped, do not push cost back to SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOCKTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Locks the transaction date as today&amp;#039;s date when entering materials in Time and Material entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOGPRINTERS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - LOGPRINTERS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOOKUPSHOWMASTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will highlight organizations that have SOLDTO or SOLDFROM as a parent attribute in the main organization and air-hammer searches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOTBYMSN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Auto-assigns the associated Project# on the purchase order as the LOT# during PO Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===M===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ManInvSpec1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the default settings of the print invoice screen to be the packing list, 2 copies, and print only checked only when manual shipping. All other instances of print invoices default the screen to standard settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MARKALLSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Marks all line items as selected when using the Manual Ship SO screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATCHBIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will prevent users from loading quantities into a carton or shipping quantities that are not available in the putaway bin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATCHOUTTOIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and all inputs and outputs are the same unit, then adjust the yield to the sum off the inputs.  PWO Item needs new ADJUSTYIELD Item Attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATCHSOL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Only Solution Codes with the same starting number as the Standard Task may be used on the timesheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATPLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables the Lock checkbox on the Material tab of the Time Entry screen. The Lock checkbox is used to byprass the pricing program in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to change the price of material entered into Time and Material entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSADJDESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will default radio button to start on second option &amp;quot;Save Adjutant Descriptions&amp;quot; in the MBS Match Up screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSAUTOSAVE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add setup option to auto save MBS grid every 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSDEFPUNCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and an item has a punch configuration question (LEADING PUNCH or rcode = &amp;quot;P&amp;quot;), and the answer is blank in the MBS import file, and punch only has 1 answer, then use that as the punch for the imported SO line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSDESCBYLOCTID &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows users to save a different MBS description per warehouse for a single item. This means that each location can have its own MBS cross reference description in a multi-location organization. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSFULLPUNCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then the MBS import will look at columns J-N on the imported spreadsheet for headings of &amp;#039;Int Punch 1&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Int Punch 2&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Int Punch 3&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Int Punch 4&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;Int Punch 5&amp;#039;.  If data is found in these columns it will be transferred to configuration questions that either match the column name (&amp;#039;Int Punch 1&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Int Punch 2&amp;#039;, etc.) or have the following report codes:  &amp;#039;IP1&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;IP2&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;IP3&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;IP4&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;IP5&amp;#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSLOADJOB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, brings the MBS Job number on the generated excel (cell H20) file during the INI conversion process. During the BOM order creation, the system will put the MBS Job number into the Confirm To field of the Sales Order header.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSNOFQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, this prevents the purchase cost of an item from being increased by the configurable length, provided the length question does not have controlling quantity selected.  The MBS Import process sets the FQTY for all configuration questions, regardless of controlling quantity. This is an override to make the MBS Import use the controlling quantity flag when setting the FQTY.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSQW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - change MBS grid logic to read QW xls file format instead of MBS format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSREADHEADER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes MBS logic to read fields from a customized cover sheet of the imported spreadsheet. Fields in Column H above row 12 are stored if the corresponding row in column I has an &amp;#039;X&amp;#039; in it. These fields can be printed on a packing list (shipsoformcomp) and on production work orders (woformmulti) by adding the &amp;#039;a_mbsheader&amp;#039; field to the form.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSROOFSLOPE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and the item has a SOC question with rcode = &amp;quot;S&amp;quot;, then the value from column F is copied into the answer of the Roof Slope question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSSHIPTXT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MBSSHIPTXT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows MBS Import to process SHIP.OUT files into XLS format. Enables the &amp;#039;Convert Ship Out&amp;#039; button in Acquire Excel Data screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSTOTWT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works in conjunction with MBSWT setup option. If set, the weight in the MBS file is treated as a total line weight, and gets divided by the line qty to import a per unit weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSWT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the weight from the MBS file is imported to the Sales Order unit weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MCMATCHTYPE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Only enable autocomplete if MCMATCHTYPE CID option enabled and file emailauotcomp.dbf in Adjutant folder. Trap for missing eamilautocomp file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MCNOXLS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the XLS Export option in Message Control for environments without Microsoft Excel installed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MILLASSESS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Process items with MILLASSESS attribute like FRT items when COGSPLIT is enabled. Cost is reallocated to other items based on qty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MILLFROMPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inserts the PO vendor name into the Mill Name during coil receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MILTIME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses Military Time throughout the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MMEXPORTONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to autocheck &amp;#039;Export Only&amp;#039; box as a default on UPDATEMINMAX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODALLPONO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Pulls a list of Received POs from Receipt history for items in the Modification Processor and allow the PO filter to capture all Mod Add In items on that purchase order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODBREAKFACTOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MODBREAKFACTOR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODBYSTKONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MODBYSTKONLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODBYSTKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, default the AllocbyQty radio button to be selected when screen opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODBYSTOCKONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MODBYSTOCKONLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODDUMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Troubleshoot issues with new cost less than original cost when processing items in large groups.  Make changes to original cost logic when Check All button used.  Add option to dump out file to z9mod temp file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODMULTISLIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will prompt the user for the number of slits when they select the &amp;#039;Slit&amp;#039; button in Mod Processor.  This controls the number of outputs that are created in the bottom grid.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODNODEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to disable Delete button on Mod Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODNOLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, suppress printing of all labels from Mod Processor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODNOLABELALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppress printing of all labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODNONSTK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, non stock items can be created by changing item code at bottom, otherwise non stock items cannot be created by changing item codes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODRECALCFT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will recalculate the weight and cost of a new item in Modification Processor according to the LBS/Ft ratio of the new item if the new output item is a coil.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODSAMELOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically uses the existing lot number as the new lot number in the Modification Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODTRANSACTION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MODTRANSACTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MONDAYWEEK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to use Monday as start day of week.  Custom form need to be changed to reflect correct week days (add 1 to both dates).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MOVEPACK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, change prompts 74 &amp;amp; 79 to transfer stock items from current bin to new C99999 bin where C99999 is the carton the items are loaded into.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MOVEUSEASSET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the current location will be updated for any serialized asset used in the production of another item when the produced item (output) is sold to a task.  In order for this to work, the produced item has to be serialized as well. This will also work for individual serialized items that are issued to a task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MPNOQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then don&amp;#039;t set qtytouse,costtouser to max value on extra items when selected  (leave at zero)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSALLOWCBINS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows C-Bin cartons to display and be selected when manual shipping or project shipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHECKBINQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then verify bin has qty to ship in it. If not, then stop shipping process. Only applies to stock items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHECKPACKED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check for packed items before starting manual ship process, and stop shipping if found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHKNOPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then check non stock items for needprod flag =&amp;#039;y&amp;#039; and no generated PWO. If found, stop shipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHKPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks to see if PO lines linked to SO lines have been received before shipping a sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHKPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks to see if production items have been completed before shipping a sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNAUTOTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically creates a Default phase and task when a new project is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNCONTRACTTAB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MSNCONTRACTTAB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNDROPNAME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes the drop folders have the XXXXXX--YYYYYY where xxxxx is the ProidID or Proj Number based on NEWMSNNUM setting, and YYYYY is the project name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNDROPSINGLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Used with MSNDROPNAME, replaces the double dash (--) with a single dash (-).         &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNHOLDOHF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, hange OHF counter update logic to ignore SO and WO on hold.  Change SO screen to check hold status of linked project and update projhold as needed.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNJCAPALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, this will display variances from AP invoices on the Job Cost report (processed by selecting the printer icon from the Job Cost tab of the Project Control screen.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNLIMITJC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, access to the Project Job Cost tab is disabled unless project security token (MSN1) option VIEW JC TAB is enabled or unless user is admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNLOADPHASEEXPAND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, expand all branches in phase tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNLOCKPHASESTART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, enable a new Project S11 security token to control access to edit the Start Date on a phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNMULTITASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then show list of phases on task tab of project and allow selecting multiple ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNEWDATELOGIC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show the new Ship Date and PWO Due Date fields on the phases tab of project control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNOCHILD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then don&amp;#039;t ask if a phase is a child of selected phase when a new phase is being created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNODELTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MSNNODELTASK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNOENDDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, ending shipping date on Master tab is set to blank.  This date is used to create the ending date on the default phase when saved  (onsite date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNOSTARTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then start with blank Project start and end dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Project Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNPHASEMAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Summary report is grouped by Phase+CommCode+Item and custom report can be adjusted to show correct grouping.  If not set then phase is not used in grouping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNPHASENOPAST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then don&amp;#039;t allow edit of phase start date to date in past unless original date is in past (to allow edit of existing phase). Do not allow create of new phase with past date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNPHASESTATUS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then add Phase selection to Project Status rule, open up the Phase Status drop down in the Project Master Phases tab and add a Phase Status filter to the Project Grid and Project Review Report (used when run in Shipping Review-Phased mode).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNPICKPHASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, when creating an SO from a Project, the user will be prompted to pick a phase for the SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNREQCUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a customer to be entered before saving a new Project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNSPLITLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, Project Sales Order and Production tabs will load the last used view options, and will not automatically reload after lost focus on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNTASKTASKSORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the default sort on the task grid of the project task tab is by task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNTRANSDAYS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show new transday field on Project Control. Trans days are calculated using drive time from project whse to main shipto using 10 hour drive days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNUPLINKEDSO1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, update linked SO load date with load date from associated project phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNUSERWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use users default whse as shipping whse for generated SO.  CalcPlant Logic will set production plant based on Whse PP rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSSHOWREADY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, opens a new &amp;quot;Ready Date&amp;quot; field in the Ship Sales Order (manual ship) screen.  The date entered is stored in the sotran table for on time delivery reporting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MTRCOPYDV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set this will copy any files from the Coil Doc Vault (visible by selecting the Lot# from the Lot tab of Item Master) to a COIL folder on the sales order and AR invoice.  If the AR is automatically printed, the contents of the COIL folder are printed along with the invoice.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MULTICID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - multicid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MULTIMACHINE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables users to assign, schedule and track the production not just by department, but by machine it is scheduled on. See ECR 36988. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MULTIRATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY. Do not apply at customer sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MULTIROLLFORMER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows integration with multiple rollformer controllers concurrently. Users can send to Connex/Beck and AMS/Eclipse controllers as needed based on the item&amp;#039;s attribute. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===N===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEW10DOCVAULT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, uses new version of DocVault with new GDViewer v 10. (disable NEWDOCVAULT)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWCOIL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWCOMM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWCOMM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWCOUNTYMBM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change logic to use only ZIPMBMA table . Add missing fields to ZIPMBMA table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWDOCVAULT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWDOCVAULT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWEMAILOCX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create new email1 program (email1new)  Call from email1 if NEWEMALOCX CID option enabled. Add new code to MessageControl (printnew), use if NEWEMAILOCX is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWITEMLOOKUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, display first 500 items by item order if ? used in description field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWLOOKUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWLOOKUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWLOOKUPADJ2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWLOOKUPADJ2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWMSNNUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then map project drop folders to Project Number instead of Project ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWNOTE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWNOTESTOEMAIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, new notes button will launch outlook mail with custno tag from the Org screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWPOREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use the newest version of the POREC screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use the newest version of the Message Control screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSEADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Newer logic for pulling the correct shipping event screen (SEADD2), will be auto added for new customers &amp;#039;&amp;#039;2015&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Newer shipping logic for shipping event screen, will be auto added for new customers &amp;#039;&amp;#039;2015&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSHIPEVENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sales Orders are linked to Shipping Events, but SO lines are not linked until truck is loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSOSCREEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWSOSCREEN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSUBM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWSUBM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSUR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Converts the Organization Discount/Surcharge and retainage logic to a back-end process that better handles partial invoicing and retainage calculations at shipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWTASKSEQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Tasks are given a new SO sequence number (CID Counter) that is separate from the Sales Order counter. The counter is set up in the CID Maintenance screen, on the Counters tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sales Tax by order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWTEMPLATEIMAGE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the Desktop and Adjutant 2020 platforms to use the same Document Vault folder location for storing image files used in Email Templates. The Doc Vaul Dropfolders (DROPFOLDERS) rule must be updated to include the new &amp;#039;EMAILTEMP&amp;#039; Doc Vault code and a valid folder path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWUSERSEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use the newest version of the user securty system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NITECTAVG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NITECTAVG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NO501&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will suppress the 501 errors when sending mail from message control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOADDNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, do not process the addnote event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOADJINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adjutant Inventory module is not installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOALERT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOALERT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOAVGCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOAVGCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOBREADCRUMBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, disable the breadcrumbs feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOBUYOUTSHEET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to allow skipping of Buyout sheet question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOCOGS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If NOCOGS is enabled, and task is not billable, then ignore posting window for labor lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOCOGSLABOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, Time Entries for resources with a Cost Factor will not create GL Postings for WIP or COGS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOGL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOGLINSTALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - General Ledger software is not installed; skips posting logic in batch generator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOHEADERPLANTCHANGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Maintains the already set Production Plant on Quotes/Orders if user answers NO to questions for updating the Plant when changing the Ship Warehouse. Overrides the Production Plant Priority default reflexes when changing the Ship Warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inventory Module not installed in 3rd Party accounting system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOLABELONASSEMBLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOLABELONASSEMBLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOLISTBEST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then do not use list price as best price if list is &amp;lt;&amp;gt; 0 and lower than price matrix (SO and RFQ)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will change VOUCHLIST screen to not automaticlly display the first file in list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOLOTORIGIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOLOTORIGIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOMATCHINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set will suppress invoices from being printed during nightly invoice processing, but allow other auto-processes to take place. Invoices will not be flagged as printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOOCTDISCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Coded to not include supplements in calculating the maximum amount.  Look for nooctdiscount cid rule which only USA uses to run through this code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPOCOILLOTCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to transfer ownership in the Transfers &amp;amp; Adjustments screen for lot controlled items staying in the same warehouse if POCOILLOTCHK is enabled. Bypasses the duplicate lot error in this specific instance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPORECSUMM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skip printing of PO Receipt Summary if enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPOSPREFIX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOPOSPREFIX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOPROFILE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPUBLICPAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option not to allow public page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOREFRESH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOREFRESH&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTEATTCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Includes the attachments from each note record&amp;#039;s Document Vault in the emails that get generated from the Note screen (when opened from Project Control).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTEEMAILALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Asks the user if they want to send an email for all notes for the project when the email button is clicked (when opened from Project Control).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTESDROP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change Email Notes linking to use RTNOTES drop folder if setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===O===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OACCMGR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The account manager on the Sales Order may be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OAHSHOWALLSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Include Work Order type Sales Orders (tasks) in the Sales Order tab of the Organization Air Hammer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled and all is selected as qty filter, 0 qty records will be added for all other matching stk items that are not in report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDASOF2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Limits the Inventory On Hand Rpt, when run in As-Of Mode, to only querying data according to the &amp;#039;Include Only&amp;#039; filters. Without this option, the report queries ALL data and then limits the outcome by the &amp;#039;Include Only&amp;#039; filters. This option can speed up the As-Of Mode by up to 50%. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDBINBYLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ONHANDBINBYLOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDINACTWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will enable a new &amp;quot;Include Inactive Warehouses&amp;quot; checkbox on the Inventory On Hand Report. If this is checked, this list of warehouses will show both active and inactive warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDRECDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the RECDATE expression on the Inventory on Hand Report cursor is populated with the oldest accounting date from itemact PR record. This applies to lot/serial and non-lot controlled inventory items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDRECDATEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the RECDATEN expression on the Inventory on Hand Report cursor is populated with the most recent accounting date from itemact PR record. This applies to lot/serial and non-lot controlled inventory items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDSOLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then fill out new soalloc field with allocation info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDVPART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, enables logic to use the &amp;quot;lastvpart&amp;quot; variable on the Inventory On Hand Report to show the vendor part number for the vendor to have last supplied the item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONSHOWCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled shows the Processor PO# and the Adjutant PO# in the On Hand grid accessed from the Item Master screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONUSAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add setup option to check Usage box by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OPENPOSHOWUSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set and report is run in detail mode, qtyissue field has qty of item used on linked svrord line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OPWOLINKDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change default report name to match dept code for the OPENPWO report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ORGPERSON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show a new dropdown (Organization/Person) If person selected, show new fiields (Firstname, lastname, MI, phone3, phone4).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ORGTASKS_RESBYSKILL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ORGTASKS_RESBYSKILL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OVERREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows your receipt quantity to be more than your order quantity in PO Receipts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===P===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PAATTACHRFQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then attach RFQ PDF to system generated email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PEPSPALSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Include all projects where the contact is the project manager, the sales person or the account manager on the people air hammer projects tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PFORCED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a project to be linked to a sales order before it can be submitted to production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PFSPWOBIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Moves non serial/lot stock items from an inventory bin into the PWO Bin. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If qty exists in probin, then move from probin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If qty exists in only one bin (regardless of whether it is probin), then move from that bin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If qty exists in more than one bin, then ask user which bin(s) to move inventory from. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PFSPWOBINA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works like PFSPWOBIN, but always shows the bin list as long as there is at least one bin with the item in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PICKBOMNOCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, unchecks the show all uses box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PL=WOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to allow Prompt 45 and Prompt 45 to treat scanned PL code as wod.keyno&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PLAINTEXT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Plaintext option (checkbox). Box is defaulted if PLAINTEXT cid option is set. For Message Control screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PLUSEBASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use base cost as input to costing functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POADDOHF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option that will auto-add missing OHF record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POAUTOCLOSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Purchase Orders will be automatically closed if all quantities have been received on the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POAUTOLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Lot numbers are automatically generated for lot controlled items during a PO Receipt. The lot number is generated from the LOTNO counter on the CID Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POAUTOPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skips over the Print PO screen when printing from the Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POAUTOPROCESS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Vendor Bids are automatically processed (emailed, faxed, printed) when they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POBLOCKLINKED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, do not ask to update linked non stock lines on PO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POBOAUTOPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with POPRINTBO, this will automatically display Message Control to view the backorder report (bypasses having to select the Output button on the backorder report).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCALCCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POCALCCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHECKADDUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Stops the Purchase Order Receipt process if the user attempting the receipt is the same user that created the Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHECKCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and new cost is different than PO cost or last rec cost by more than 10%, warn user upon receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHECKMAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks the order quantity on the PO against the Max level in the OHF tab of the Item Master. If the order quantity plus the current on hand quantity exceeds the Max quantity, an alert will be given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show 2 new radio buttons on the Print PO screen for &amp;quot;Include Inbound Receipt&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Include Inbound Report&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHKAPINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, any PO line that has been linked to an active AP Invoice will not allows edits to the line and will not allow the line to be returned, unless the linked AP Invoice is voided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCLEARPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will clear linked project information from the line items when copying Purchase Orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCOILLBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Stocks coil inventory items in lbs and catches linear feet (as opposed to stocking in linear feet and catching lbs).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCOILLOTCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check for duplicate coil lot numbers in same whse.  Do not allow receipt of duplicate lots, warn if modifcation will create duplicate lots with qty &amp;lt;&amp;gt; 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCOILLOTCHKWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to prevent duplicate lot numbers (any item, any whse).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCOPYPODATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set,  put cursor into PO date when copy is started.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PODISABLELCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PODISABLELCOUNT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POEDITSTKDESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POEDITSTKDESC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POGENMATCHVENDOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled when using the Generate PO Grid from the sales order screen, if users change a vendor on one item, it will update all other items to that vendor if the item has that vendor set up in the C/V part tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POGENSKIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POGENSKIP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POHIDEPRICEADJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POHIDEPRICEADJ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POIGNORETAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ignores sales tax amount on purchase order receipts in regards to GL posting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POINSERTGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically inserts the Inventory Control account into the GL Acct field on the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POINSERTTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inserts the ordered item into the Materials section of Task Entry instead of directly onto the Time and Material Entry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POITEMBOXSKIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Eliminates the &amp;quot;List/Add/Reenter/Non&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLABELMANY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Label counts default to quantity ordered on Print PO Labels screen. Defaults to 1 if not set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLINEISLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Appends a dash and the line number onto the Lot# of an item with the PONOISLOTNO attribute. Change lot # gen logic to add- PO Line number if POLINEISLOT CID setup up is set and item has PONOISLOTNO attrib.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLINKPUSHCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow linking an already received Purchase Order line back to a Sales Order line to update the Sales Order line&amp;#039;s cost. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLOCKGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Locks/disables the GL Acct field when a stock item is entered onto a PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLOCKWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Locks/disables the Rec Whse field on Purchase Order line items. All lines will be received into the warehouse listed on the PO Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLOTPROJPHASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If option is enabled, and item has PONOISLOTNO attribute, use PO-PROJ#-PHASE as lotnumber.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PONOISLOTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically assigns the PO# as the Lot # when receiving lot controlled items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PONOTEMPLATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the template box is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PONONSTOTS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents Non-Stock items on PO linked to a Task from being added to the Material tab of the Time Entry screen until they are received on the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PONOZEROCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then do not allow receipt of zero cost lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POPRINTALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Report option to PO receipt screen.   New PORECALLOC report only shows linked SO lines (linked to this PO receipt, and unlinked SO lines with matching items.  Items are sorted by estdate, with linked items first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POPRINTBO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Asks if you want to print the Backorder Report after receiving a PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POQUALVEND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then allow selection of unqualified vendor, show message box and blank out vendor fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POQUOTEDCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses Quoted Cost, instead of Last Cost, from vendor on all PO&amp;#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECCHGWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows you to change the receiving warehouse during a PO Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECFAST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Opens the Quick PO Receipt screen when clicking the PO Receipt icon on the PO screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECSHOWLAST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add last rec cost and last rec date fields to PO receipt (POREC) screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECUPCOST2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, paired with PORECUPSOCOST, the system will use the extcost from the linked PO line, rather than the per unit cost. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECUPCOST3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will allow SO line items that are linked to multiple PO lines to use the cost of the sum total of the PO&amp;#039;s line items cost. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECUPSOCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically updates the Sales Order line item cost for SO line items that are linked to PO lines (based upon cost on PO).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECUPSODESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically updates the Sales Order description for SO line items that are linked to PO lines (based upon item description on PO).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POREMOVEPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, project and phase are blanked out on lost focus of SO/Svr Link if SO/Svr Link is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POREQGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires that a GL account number be entered for every item on a PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POREQTODAY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the Req Date on a PO to today&amp;#039;s date. The default is today plus three days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORETKILLASSET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, assets that are created upon PO receipt will be flagged as inactive if the PO receipt is returned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORRNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set use Note from SOLDFROM Screen as PO Header note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSBANKFILL1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will automatically fill out the Bank Deposit number with the Post Date on the POS screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSELECTLINES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new checkbox to printPO screen to show new grid to select PO lines to print.  All selected by default, can be selected, unselected as needed.  Unselected lines are removed from printing cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWBECOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new becost field to PO/Bid PO. Field prints on PO/BID PO  (potran.becost and pobtran.becost are database fields).  becost on PO report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWCONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSHOWCONFIG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWCONFIGBID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSHOWCONFIGBID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWCONFIGORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSHOWCONFIGORD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows an editable list price field on the PO line item tab as a reference. If changed, a prompt will ask if you would like to update the list price on the item master screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWSHIPNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set show the custno (shipto id) field directly above the Ship Direct To name field on the PO Master tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSKIPLABELS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PO labels will not print on receipt of items when label engine is running.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSKIPLABELSCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set skip printing labels during receipt of coils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSLAUNCHCC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will launch a credit card processing screen when &amp;#039;Credit Card&amp;#039; is selected in the POS screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSOALLOCATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then allocate linked lines in SOALLOCATE table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSALLOWOVER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then allow POS transaction for more; then open SO amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSOCUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSOCUST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSPLITTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Split tax out on itemact record if POSPLITTAX is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSUBSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, display the Subcon Service checkbox on the Generate Purchase Orders For screen if called from a Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSWITCHWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically updates all PO line items with new Receiving Warehouse when it is changed on the PO Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then default cash payment amount to zero in Process Cash Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POTAB1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, tabbing on the Serial/Lot Details tab of the PO Receipt Screen (New version) will always go from one serial to the next serial instead of across the rest of the fields per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POTASKLINKCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, then items received on a PO that is linked to a completed task will be populated on the materials tab of the time entry record for that task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POTEMPWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new temp whse field to POREC screen.  If filled in, items are received into this whse, and then put on the next interplant SE as transfer items.  Items on SE transfers appear as on order to the TWhse, and allocated from the FWhse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POTGENSUBCON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the Generate Purchase Orders screen to show all vendors with the new SUBCONTRACTOR attribute in the vendor drop down instead of vendors from the vendor part tab of the line items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POUPDATEDROUTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Updates Delivery Route Shipping Events for back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POUSERISBUYER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and user is a buyer, PO  will default with them  as buyer. fF POUSERISBUYER is set, PO cannot be saved with a blank buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POUSETAXFLAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, default taxable status matches ItemMaster Sales Tax Flag (resell flag is ignored).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POWARNPURUNIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Alert user if Unit on PO &amp;lt;&amp;gt; Pur unit on item master.  CID option POWARNPURUNIT enables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PREFERDRAWING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and an item has the CUSTOMTRIM attribute, the Trim Drawing tool will automatically prompt/load before the Configuration (SOC) screen in Quotes and Sales Orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Print Inventory Label screen will print the same labels as the Item Master Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTCOILLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and NOLABLESONASSEMBLY set, print coil tags anyway (Wireless production).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTCREDIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prompts to print invoice form after creating open credit. If setup option is set, then use OPENCR counter to generate _OPENCR- invoice number (so they will be unique).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVCOILREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add all fields from coil tag to c_coilr cursor. Used on report just like soc fields. Added logic to PDF maker. Enabled with CID option PRINTINVCOILREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVAUTOLOG &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- Adds logging into the Autolog table when using the &amp;quot;Auto Process&amp;quot; Check box on the Print Invoice screen. It will also export a list of invoice ranges to process into a .txt file into the Adjutant folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVNOZEROS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically selects the &amp;quot;Exclude Zero Dollar Lines&amp;quot; option on the Print Invoices screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVSKIPZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new Skip Zero Dollar invoice checkbox.  Skip printing zero dollar invoices if checked, mark as printed only.  Add setup option (PRINTINVSKIPZERO) to default the checkbox as checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVSPECDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add a small pageframe with date range and state field to Print Invoice screen.  Screen pops up when a button is pressed.  When active, the date range and state logic is used to selecte the invocies to print.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTPAUSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add delay between printing each invoice to keep them in the correct order in the printing queue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSOBOTH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the Print SO screen to print both the Packing List and Sales Order by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSOEXBL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PRINTSOEXBL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSOLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PRINTSOLABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSTMT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, change print invoice prompt to print statements.  If yes,  launch PRINTBS1, PRINTBS2 and BILLSUMMARY with current ORG and BILLCYCLE filled in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSTMTC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new printer button that only is visible if PRINTSTMT, PRINTC1STMT or PRINTC2STMT is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSTMTC2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new printer button that only is visible if PRINTSTMT, PRINTC1STMT or PRINTC2STMT is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROCESSRT &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically runs calculations for run time without the need to manually run it from the Production Capacity screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODROP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Service to handle moving files from drop folders into sub folders; Add to FoxProcess service, make setup option to disable in docvault screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODROPCHANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Process to look at asset drop folders, and move CHANT files to correct asset folders, Continue testing, move into AdjItemDet service, run every 10 minutes. Option enabled per CID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJALLOCINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the &amp;quot;Allocate Inventory&amp;quot; option to be checked by default on the Project Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJAUTOSONUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically numbers sales orders generated from the Project. Project ID is used as first SO. A dash with a number starting at 01 will accompany future sales orders (PROJID)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJCLOSESOCLOSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PROJCLOSESOCLOSE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJCOMPSOCLOSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PROJCOMPSOCLOSE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECTRESOURCE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Turns on the following logic on the timesheet_daily page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*1.  Gray out the client field and set the cursor to start in the project field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*2.  Change the Project field to be a drop-down with Project and Phase listed.  Limit the options to Projects that are linked to the Resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*3.  Automatically set the Resource to the logged in user and do not allow the user to change this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*4.  Automatically set the bill code according to the Project-Phase-Resource and do not allow the user to change this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJHELDFOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically generates a HeldFor record in the HOLDER rule for projects that are set to allocate inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJNEWSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This is for customers who use project shipping but don&amp;#039;t have SHIPSOINV enabled.  This setup creates invoices when batches are generated.  If this is the way you are setup, you&amp;#039;ll want to enable this option. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJOPPDVMBSID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PROJOPPDVMBSID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJOPPNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PROJOPPNOTES&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJOPPSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - projoppsp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJOPPWONLOSTTOP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - projoppwonlosttop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJTASKCRANE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, fill out quest1,quest2 and quest3/Quest4 with questions/answers from AFI system. Shows the answers to the three questions related to the AFI Crane app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJTOSHIPTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The Project Name is used as the Ship To location name when generating a new Ship To from Project Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROMPTTAXAPPLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Prompts the user with a Yes/No option to automatically apply a Tax Credit Invoice to the Invoice it was created from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRONOXLS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Disables the automatic sending of an attached XLS file for &amp;#039;Email&amp;#039; method notification alerts that normally include an XLS file.       &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PSODEFCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then default cash/check radio button to check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PUSHERROR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Finish web service to allow pushing of error log data to abis server. Enable with PUSHERROR CID Setup option.  Used in place of EMAILERROR option (did not work if email not fully setup). Change ErrorOne to use PUSHERROR option if setup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWO45COMMA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the system will move the auto assemble one logic after the PWO Line scan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWO45PM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show PM on prompt 45 scans as line #2 (on all screens where there is room).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOADDAMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOADDAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOADDATREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically inserts received items into the Assigned Inventory section of a Production Work Order when a production SO line is linked to a PO line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOADDPROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds fields from profile table to Print PWO cursor (If  PWOADDPROFILE CID option set).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOADDSTOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set,  insert dummy lines into cursor for pullfromstock lines and non production lines.  Lines will be sorted to bottom, and have g1 = &amp;#039;z&amp;#039; in cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOALLOCLIST2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, will update the sort and grouping functionality of the Production Work Order screen to allow allocated material to float to a section above the production lines. Qlot, Qqty and Qonhand fields will now show lot, allocated quantity and on hand quantities for allocated material on a production work order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOALLOCLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will automatically allocate produced coil to the attached sales order from the PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOALLOCSPLIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, PWO forms will be able to be formatted to display PWO Input item details above PWO Output item details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOAUTOCONSIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, try to use consig items if not enough from correct owner avail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOBOMLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prints the Bill of Material list for a production item on the Production Work Order form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOBOMLIST4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOBOMLIST4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOBOMSORTBYITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and PWO is single based item, then the BOM list of codes will print in item order instead of BOM order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCHECKASSEMCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOCHECKASSEMCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCLOSEUNUSED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then close PWOs without any material assigned when closing linked Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCMPXBOM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOCMPXBOM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCOPYDV &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will pull attached documents to a coil tag, such as MTRs, and pull them through to assigned PWOs, assigned sales orders, and the following invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCUTLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Build CutList during sub generation, and add back to PWO Header note. CID option PWOCUTLIST enables option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWODATEIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change adddate of ItemTrack record to oldest add date of used lot controlled material.  CID option PWODATEIN enables change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWODDREQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will use Header ReqDate as the source for the PWO duedate calculations (system will still use existing rule setup, but will use ReqDate as the base not Load Date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWODELAMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, send Deletes to AMS if PWO is deleted from AMS if non PWOSETBUNDLE system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOFLAGLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will print from the PWO Label program. If not set, will try to use the default inventory labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2MATASS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then highlight a line green on the Production Schedule screen if ANY material has been assigned to that line on the work order. This replaces the default &amp;#039;Can Make&amp;#039; logic which highlights the line green if BOM raw material is available to make the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2MULTIDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOG2MULTIDEPT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2MULTIPLANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows selection of more than one plant when processing list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2SDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then filter dates using PWO start date instead of due date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2SORTDD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then sort by DueDate+Dept by default on the Production Scheduler (SCHEDMASG2) screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOLOADWOLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then lc_wolist will have a list of other PWO that have the same lots assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOLOCKDUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then disable edit of due date when in edit mode (allow edit during add mode).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOLOCKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then do not allow edit of qty for non build for stock PWO lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOLOCKWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, lock the whse and plant after the order is added. Do not allow access in edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOMAKESUB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, subassemblies will be made regardless of the current stocking level.  When this is disabled, the subassembly work order is only created if there isn&amp;#039;t enough currently available.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOMATCHYIELD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option that makes the ORIG qty on BuildForStk PWOs match the Default Yielded Qty from the BOM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONEWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Recalc avgcost for SOTRAN based on assembled cost/qty and shipped costqty. Add logic to Wireless Assembly, and PWO Disassembly. CID Setup option PWONEWCOST enables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONEWCOST2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Updates Production cost for all like items on same PWO (Same logic, Unshipped PWO cost / Unshipped Assem Qty used to find Unshipped Produced cost, then apply to all like lines (by item code). Test new costassembly logic using wireless terminals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOAUTONON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, it disables the auto assign buttons on the Non S/L tab and the All Non S/L tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOCHKPARTIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Unchecks the Warn on Partial Allocation checkbox by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOCTN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with PWOCUTLIST, CID option will stop pushing to note  (unable to update note if PWOs are changed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONONSNEG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents you from allocating more material to a work order than you have available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOPRINTRESET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to stop resetting PWO printed flag on RevNumer Change of SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOTE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When turned on will pass the Paint Code and Coat information from the coil used in production to the Pnote of the finished good. The information appends to the Pnote, in the case that there is already something in the Pnote field. If more than one coil is being used, the information will be passed through for each coil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOWTUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the PWO assembly weight from updating the unit weight already stored in the sales order line.  This should only be used if customer is using weight values imported from MBS, or otherwise manually maintained in the sales order record. This works with both desktop production and terminal/scanner production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONSFROMPLANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, this will use the plant&amp;#039;s non-stock account during the invoicing process (instead of the shipping warehouse&amp;#039;s non-stock account). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOONLYONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then production from a SO will be put on one PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOPOSSWT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOPOSSWT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOPRINTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - See TSPRINTING.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOPRINTIMAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the the SO drop folder is checked for a JPG or PDF that matches the department name.  If found, then it is printed as a second document after the PWO.  If PDF then the image conversion tool must be installed on all workstations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOQDIFF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will prompt the user  to select a reason for the difference when assigning material during production, if the quantity assigned/used is not equal to the quantity required in the BOM (=/- 1 foot). The reasons are a set drop down list managed in the [[PWOQDIFF Rule | PWOQDIFF rule]]. The answers given are stored in the WOUSAGE table for reporting and reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOQTYONTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Rewrite the task description (of the linked task) and update the task qty if the qty is changed on the SO and then resubmitted to production. Update Task descriptions on Resubmit to Production if PWOQTYONTASK enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWORCODEAONTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then answer of A rcode question from SOC for item starting route is added to start of task. Example: If Team A is the ans to question with RCode of A, the task will be Team A: Rest of Task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWORECALCAVG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Attempts to calculate Avg Cost for produced goods based on stock units, where not being made in stock unit. Sets a more realistic AvgCost for panels, etc. Rather than showing an average cost based on each, it builds an average cost based on the stock unit (usually feet).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOREOPEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add buttons to reopen header and lines (UnComplete).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOREQALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then all assignments must be assigned on the PWO for production be to completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOREQCERT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires all production items to be certified before being assembled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOREQINPUT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and PWO does not have any assigned input, do not allow assembly of line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWORESETREQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then reset serial/lot req to actual BOM qty in cases where bom item is only assigned to PWO once (single lot/serial)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWORESQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, pop up grid to verify which resource assembled each yield.  If only one resource assigned to line item task(s), then auto-populate resource field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAMELOTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the input&amp;#039;s lot# as the yield&amp;#039;s lot#.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAMELOTNOU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change RebuildWOBOM logic to handle split lots instead of split serials; Add new setup option PWOSAMELOTNOU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAMELOTNOU2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to assign counters just based on lot, not item + lot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAVEPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and print only is used, save PDF version of PWO into Project doc vault if linked to project, else save to SO docvault.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAVEPRINTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOSAVEPRINTER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSELECTSM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, single or multi status is pulled from PWOFORMS rule (log1 = SIngle, Log2 = Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSEPARATELIKEITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Separates all items on the Assign Inventory tabs. Default logic will group same items together if there are separate records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSETBUNDLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create new screen to allow splitting AMS lines by bundle.  Allow auto split on Line#, PMark, Item and Profile. Allow manual split and combine as wanted. Check for bundles over pcs count and lbs count on save. Check for unbundled/over bundled items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSHOWWAIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOSHOWWAIT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSOORDER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Orders the Production Work Order form in the same order as the Sales Order. Default logic will sort the PWO by item code and then by length descending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSTOCKPM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows using the Auto-Assign function on a work order to assign the current OH of an input provided it meets the threshold defined in the PWOSTOCKPM rule.  The num1 field of the PWOSTOCKPM rule defines this threshold.  For example, if the num1 value is &amp;#039;5&amp;#039; that will allow auto-assign to work if you have 95% of the needed quantity on hand.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSWAPSERIALUK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to swap serial to _UK at assembly point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOTASKDESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to change task descrip to first 50 characters of item description of first line on the PWO (Last 10 chars is same logic from PWOQTYONTASK).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOTOA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOTOA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOTRANSCONSIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically transfers consignment inventory to the default Owner when the inventory is first used in production. It will also transfer amounts from the consignment PO clearing account to the default Owner&amp;#039;s PO clearing account.  This works with production from the Production Work Order Master, Prompt 45, Prompt 46, Prompt 48, and Connex.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOUPDATESOQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled and WO is linked to SO and qty changes, will ask to update/Add items to SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOYESCHKPARTIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check the warn on partial allocation box, and disable the checkbox. Add logging to UserTrace when Continue assembly message is shown, and user selects yes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWSWITCHWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSWITCHWHSE setup option suppresses the intial prompt, but did not suppress the results message.  Change to suppress results if PWSWITCHWHSE is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Q===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QADDQCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses base cost as quoted cost if adding an item on Basics tab. Uses today as quote date, and today + 90 days as quote expiration date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBADDSOBUYOUT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, force in non stock items that have not been purchased yet into quckbuy screen.  Each SO Line item is a line on the quickbuy grid.  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Be careful when activating this.  When it&amp;#039;s activated it will add any non-stock item on a sales order that hasn&amp;#039;t been purchased yet to Quick Buy, but deactivating the setup option doesn&amp;#039;t clear these items from Quick Buy.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBADDTOPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow selection of existing PO when generating actual PO (not bids).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBAUDITQCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add logging to boxlog when cost is changed in grid, and when PO cost &amp;lt;&amp;gt; system calc cost when generating PO.  PO cost audit enabled with setup option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBBACKOUTAQB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically removes QB lines created from the Min/Max reflexes when a matching QB line is created from the Add to Quick Buy function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBCHECKONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If selected, the Quick Buy report will only print for items currently selected in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBCUSTOMRRQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - QBCUSTOMRRQ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBGRPPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then group PWOs by dept when generating in QB Make(will only ask for 1 due date, all will have that due date)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBNOPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Roll unsubmitted PWO inputs and outputs into QB onorder and allocated numbers. (Requires date range to be entered on other filters tab)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBPICKTRANSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will allow user to choose the Shipping Event to add the stock item on the Quick Buy screen when using Transfer mode. When hitting the Generate button, it shows a grid of upcoming Shipping events, up to 60 days out, to the receiving location. The grid shows columns for the SE Number, cut off and load dates from the shipping events, as well as current and estimated weights on the shipping events.  The Shipping Event is a drillable field in the grid and can be accessed from the grid. The item(s) will be added to the selected Shipping Event. Estimated weights are recalculated when the grid is loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBPROJASCUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - QBPROJASCUST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBSHOWALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new OnHandALL and Usage1-5 All columns.  Enable with QBSHOWALL option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBSHOWWAIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - QBSHOWWAIT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBSOXPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - QBSOXPO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBSPLITTRANS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -- If set, then any item can be selected in Quick Buy when processing transfers, regardless of the source warehouse&amp;#039;s stocking levels.  A separate interplant shipping event (with a type of &amp;#039;PO&amp;#039;) will be created for any items where the source warehouse doesn&amp;#039;t have a sufficient AVAIL quantity to fill the transfer request.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBUNSCHED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, checkbox set to pull in unscheduled allocations/onorder numbers when limiting by date range in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QSUPHIDE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, hide contact, contract and status fields from Quick Task screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QSUPNOTASKPFIX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to exclude Standard Task code from Task title when created from Quick Support screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QTNOSHOWCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to suppress task complete popup. Don&amp;#039;t blank out date after save. Refresh Daily View Screen if active.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QTREQPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to Make Project Required. Quick Time Entry already has option (QTREQPROJ). Added to Quick Support II&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QTYONTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enbabled, then display quantity fields on Task Entry screen.  Otherwise, hide quantity fields and remove from tab order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QUICKADDITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Default to Basics tab on Item Master when adding item on&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===R===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REBUILDCONN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - REBUILDCONN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RECALCLEAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Recalculates the Vendor Lead Time on PO Receipts according to value entered in LEADRECALC rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RECALCLEADMAN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Screen appears after PO receipt showing old lead time and new lead time for each item on PO. User has option to select which items to update lead times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REDIRECTCART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - E-Commerce: Redirect to Shopping Cart after adding item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REDIRECTHOME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - E-Commerce: Redirect to Home after adding item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REMITTERMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, terms come from remitto, not po during ap invoice generation using a PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REPBASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Primarily used in water districts. Reprice base, if you change base cost and it is not a misc item, it asks if you would like to reprice open service orders that are not tied to a PO using new base costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REPRICESPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, task repricing process will use the sprice unit, rather than the default unit value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REPRINTC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then prompt 71 will always reprint carton label (not bundle label).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQCOMPSVRORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Completed Service Order to Bill.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQCONTRACT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Contract on Task Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Department for Task Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQMETER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Meter on Time Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Notes before time entry may be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQPRIORITYRFQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces the user to select a Priority on the Quote header before converting the quote to a SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQPROBCODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Standard Task on Task Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQRESOURCE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, requires a resource to be specfied in Task Assignment area before the Task can be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQSHIPVIASO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require ShipVia on Sales Order before continuing to Line Items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQSOLCODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, all time entries need solution codes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQWORKCAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Work Category on Task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESCOSTTOGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Creates COGS entry for resource cost factor when a timesheet entry is billed. If set, make billtran cost = resource costfactor, if not set, make billtran cost = 0 for resource lines. Cost will post to COGS and Wip Acct of labor Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESETAPPR1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then approvals are not reset unless terms or ordamt changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESETHEATNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, blank out HeatNo on each new receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESETMILLCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will reset the mill coil number to blank on each PO receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESNOSQAUDSCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - RESNOSQAUDSCH&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REVPROJWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will force the COGS and Revenue GL Distributions to be based on the Warehouse selected on the project header screen when using projects. This will allow multi-site projects with production and purchasing costs to go to the warehouse named on the project header rather than the producing or purchasing warehouses. The general ledger will follow the standard routing for the project header warehouse based on GL Groups. All material will flow through the purchasing and producing Stock, non stock and WIP accounts as usual. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This change allows all Cost and Revenue to go to the main project warehouse rather than to the other sites that may produce or purchase for the main project warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQALLOCREADONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Lot Allocation screen will appear in read only mode if it is called from the RFQ screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQALLOWLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds button to quote screen to Lock quote. Anyone can lock, takes special security token to unlock (RFQ: Unlock (s10))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQAPPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - RFQAPPR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQBULKPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, allow editing Quote Line Item prices using the &amp;#039;New Price&amp;#039; field on the Line Item View tab of the Quote screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQBYITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to sort printed RFQ by item then line number. Make same change to PDFMAKER.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQCOPYNUMBER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes the new quote number the old quote number with a-999 on the end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQCOPYREV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, system will act as if revision during copy processs.  If yes, then revision number logic will be used, if not, then normal number logic will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQIDNOALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set any allocations selected will not actually be allocated to the quote.  This is especially useful for Track Length items.  Since there are different lengths/widths under one item code the counterperson can use the allocation screen to see the availability of different lengths/widths and select one but not actually allocate inventory based on their selection.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQIMPORT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This enables a button on the Header tab of the Customer Quote screen that allows importing items onto quotes.  More information can be found [[Orders|HERE]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLIMITCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will use the older Credit limit check logic for just the RFQ converts.  This will allow using credit limit checks on RFQs, and Approval based checks on Sales Orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLOCKAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to lock Accoutn Manager in by organization attribute and not by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLOCKPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds the lock price checkbox from the SO screen to the RFQ screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLOCKPRICECHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically checks the lock price box on line entry to RFQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLOCKSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to lock Sales Person in by organization attribute and not by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQNOREPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to set norepice checkbox after line save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQPRICENAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to enable Price Update Message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQPRINTPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the full PrintPO screen is loaded when converting a quote to an order, or when generating bids from a quote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQPRINTSCREEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays Additional Print Screen and options when printing a Customer Quote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQRESETDROPSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - RFQRESETDROPSHIP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQRESETLINECHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, overrides the default behavior of the Hide Line and Hide Price flags in the Quote screen by clearing the flags on each new line entry. (Use option SORESETLINECHK for the Sales Order screen).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQSETSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - RFQSETSP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQSHOWLF2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, will show the linear feet of all panel on the quote. The items need to be in the Panel (PA) department to be included in total.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQSHOWTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will default the tax boxed to checked on print RFQ screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQTIMERPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Includes a PDF attachment of the quote when the Quote Timed Alert emails are sent out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQTIMERAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will copy the account manager on the quote instead of the salesperson when the Quote Timed Alert emails are sent out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQUPDATELIKE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will ask users to update price for all like items if the price for a line is updated in the Line Item View grid on the Quote screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQUPPRICELOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, do not reprice lines with &amp;quot;Lock Price&amp;quot; flag when using the Update Quote Pricing Button on header tab (uP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ROGRID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will change the font of column headers that you can edit in to red when turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ROLL12BASECOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to pull basecost from SO when calculating invoice cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ROOFSLOPE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and the item has a SOC question with rcode = &amp;quot;S&amp;quot;, then the value from column F is copied into the answer of the Roof Slope question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ROUNDPRICE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If unit price &amp;gt;25, and price is list price based, then round price up to next dollar. Change SO screen to round price up to next dollar if ROUNDPRICE1 CID option is set, and price is based on ListPrice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDMATERIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds a &amp;#039;Has Material&amp;#039; checkbox to the Task Grid which displays a check if material has been added to the service order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDPOLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, populate new POLIST column with linked PO Numbers on Task Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDTOTAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds Labor Time, Equipment Time, and Total Time (Lab+Equip) columns to the Task Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDWHSEFILT2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows sorting tasks on the Task Grid by the warehouse indicated on a project.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDTOTALDUR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add TotalDur Column to Task Grid.  Sum of all durations for a given task. Filled Out if RTGRIDTOTALDUR is enabled (CID option).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RUNNITEBALSEP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, run the Nightinv GL Balance program at 11pm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===S===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PALLNONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set; then either make the full quantity, or none on current stock levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PBYPHASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes S2P to make due dates from linked phases, also splits PWOs by phase and department.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PBYPHASE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, reset start date to duedate - longest fab date of any item on Sub PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PDISPLAYPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skips &amp;quot;Print Production Work Orders?&amp;quot; question and automatically displays the Production Work Order screen(s). If cid option is set, launch PWO screen for each PWO instead of bringing up print screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PFULLQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Always defaults to qtyord as production qty. If set, then make qtyord qty (Click on ALL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PNONSTKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Opens the S2P Select Qty to Produce screen with all stock production item&amp;#039;s Qty to Produce value set to zero, matching the function of clicking the &amp;#039;Non-Stk Only&amp;#039; button by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, then the S2P screen will use projected onhand to determine if the item needs to be produced. Also changes the SSA screen to use projected qty to color code lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PSTOCKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set the qty2make will be set to the order qty if the order qty &amp;lt; on hand qty, else will be set to 0, pull from stock will be set to order qty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDCONFMOVE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SCHEDCONFMOVE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDMONTHLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Opens schedule screen in monthly view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDMULTI&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Opens schedule screen in multi-stack view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDPROFESSION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Show vcontact.profession underneath Resource Name on Schedule screen. If set, append profession from contact screen to end of current resource name, hours string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDPROJID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays ProjID as first characters on task bar (instead of shortcust). Option to set bartext to projjid instead of shortcust.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDSHOWSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to show ShipTo Company Name in time bars instead of SoldTo names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDSTARTFIRST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SCHEDSTARTFIRST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDWEEKLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Opens schedule screen in weekly view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHNOW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Schedule Task at Current Time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHPHASE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Task Hover Tooltip on the schedule to show detailed information regarding the linked Project Phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHSHOWDT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows estimated drive time on Schedule screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SE2SOSORT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sorts the sales order section of the Shipping Event Summary report by Drop Number, then sales order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SE2SOCARTLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables the &amp;quot;CartList&amp;quot; variable on the Shipping Event Summary report. When enabled, cartlist will print out the cartons on each sales order, along with the departments represented. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEADDNOCUSTCONT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the &amp;quot;Mark Customer as Contacted on Shipping Event?&amp;quot; prompt from appearing if the Packing Slip is printed from the Load Shipping Event screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEADDTODR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables a prompt when you manually add a sales order to a delivery route shipping event.  This prompt allows you to add the delivery route from the shipping event to the Organization&amp;#039;s Ship To record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEAUTOSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEAUTOSHIP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEBESTBIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enabled, use current bin as ProBin on report.  If more than one bin, make a list BIN(qty),BIN(qty)... If nothing on hand, use ProBin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEBOTRANS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prioritizes the Backorder highlight color over the Transfer Item color in Load Shipping Event screen when an item is both Backorder and Transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECALCFREIGHT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Includes freight value when calculating the Estimated Value field.  If not enabled, exclude freight from calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECHECKBINQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the selected bin is checked for qty&amp;gt;load qty during carton packing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECHECKPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, add (NP) to the end of the SO line in clist if item still has pending production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECHEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If Set, show new radio buttons on the Print Post Load report screen for &amp;quot;Trucker Fax Delivery Information&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Trucker Fax Pick Up Information&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Shipment Notification&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECHKUNLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then warn when unlinking a SO from shipping event master if the SO has lines that are packed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEDEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEDEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEEXCLALLOCSL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEEXCLALLOCSL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEEXCLPRODSL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEEXCLPRODSL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEFILTERCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEFILTERCHK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEGS128LABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEGS128LABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEHIDETRANS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Hide Transfers box to checked on the Load Shipping Event and Print Pre-Load screens. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SELINK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SELINK2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SELINK3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SELINK4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Enable users to link specific lines to specific shipping events and manage shipping events by sales order lines rather than an entire order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELLUNITPRICING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use the selling unit as the input to the price lookup from the pricing tables and the contract price tables.  If not set, then use the selling price unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOAUTOLBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, the system will never auto-calculate the Estimated LBS field. It must be manually input for every Shipping Event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOAUTOVALUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, the system will never auto-calculate the Estimated Value field. It must be manually input for every Shipping Event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOCHK60&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, do not check the +/- 60 day checkbox on the SE screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOLOTALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, prevent the user from selecting lot/serials on the Item Transfer Tab of the SE Master that are allocated to sales orders or other Shipping Event Transfers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOUNLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option (SENOUNLOAD) that disables the unload button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOPRODLBS &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will calculate the estimated weight on the Shipping Event by excluding not-yet-produced material from the weight. The weight calculation will only include completed production, received buyouts and stock material. This calculation will only effect the estimated pounds on the shipping event. The actual will continue to update as material is loaded. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the setup option will exclude not-yet-produced material from the pre-load report. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENUPSOREQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will update the linked SO REQ Date when the Shipping Event On-Site Date is changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENUPSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, Adjutant will update SO Load Dates, Ship Vias, and SO Line Est. Dates when the linked shipping event Load Date and Ship Via fields are edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPACKLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEPACKLABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPAPPRCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then all linked sales order must be approved before SE Preload or SE Post Load can be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPCHECKAPPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEPCHECKAPPR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPOST2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, defaults Adjutant to use the SEPOST2 version of the Post Load Report, which has more features than the original SEPOST version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPOSTDROPPAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add CID option to default Page Break check (SEPOSTDROPPAGE) on Post Load report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPOSTNODROPRESORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, it will skip the second sort if page break by dropno is selected. This will allow users to run the report with the Sort By &amp;quot;SO#/Dept&amp;quot; option and the &amp;quot;Page Break by Drop No&amp;quot; option at the same time. This only affects the SEPOST2 (V2) version of the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPPNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the SE Pre-Load Report will print SO Line Shipping notes under the specific cartonized item when using the CLIST (carton list) expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPREBINORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, sort by bin and department instead of item. For Pre-Load report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPREBINORD2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, sort alphabetically by bin name instead of item. For Pre-Load report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPREDROPORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add dropno to main cursor. Add setup option to sort by dropno (SEPREDROPORD). Add logic to copy dropno from shipto cursor into main cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPRELINEORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEPRELINEORD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPUDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then use PickupDate as controlling date for report if filled out, else fall back to shipdate (loaddate). Shipping forecast report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEREPCLOSESE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEREPCLOSESE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEREPORTTAB1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to start on first tab. Shipping event viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SERIAL2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add logic to pull serial2 from rtasset table, and use as mnum2 as needed  (when updating meter info in conninfo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SERIALBYWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change S2P logic to generate serial numbers from different counters based on plant if CID option SERIALBYWHSE is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SERVICEPROCESS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SERVICEPROCESS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHIPSINGLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SESHIPSINGLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWBO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, defaults the &amp;quot;Show Backorders&amp;quot; box to checked on the Post Load Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWCPU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If set then show new Customer Pickup Checkbox. If set, then create an event (SE-CPU-XX-YYYY), where XX is SE type, and YYYY is whse name. Event is CR type if SE is new, ED type if edit of existing SE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWFTLBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add QtyinFT and QtyinLBS expressions to Pre-Load and Post-Load reports when enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWINCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new fields (QtyInInch and PMark) to cursor, fill out for items.  Use FT or IN from unit, or SOC.Rcode = B for inches value.  Use Soc.Rcode = A for Piece Mark.  Enable with SESHOWINCH.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWSERLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Make allocated ser/lots and production serial/lots appear as seperate lines on report. Make logic to split lines a setup option (SESHOWSERLOT)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESORTADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set the sorts are added to each other on the &amp;quot;Orders W/O SE&amp;quot; tab of the shipping event viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SETQTYTOBLANK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, defaults the qty field to be blank instead of 0 on the material tab of time entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SETRANSIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If found, transfer items from intercompany SE&amp;#039;s to IN-TRANSIT whse when carton is shipped. When unloading carton, move from IN-TRANSIT whse instead of source whse if option is enabled. Change UnloadCart to use original cost tier if possible. This will make the inventory flow thru the IN-Transit whse at the same cost. Change SEADD2 to unlock UnLoad button if SENOUNLOAD is enabled and SETRANSIT is enabled and SE is intercompany. Change allocated logic to show items allocated from IN-Trans whse once they are shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SETTOONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add button Display coil screen to allow a zero qty coil to be reset to a qty of 1. This will allow the Inv Trans/Adj screen to be used to reset the qty of the coil if needed. If enabled, and qty of coil is &amp;lt;=0, the button will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEVIEWCURRLBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Fill out current wt column with shipevent.estlbs by default. If option is selected, then use shipevent.curlbs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHAREDATADIR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, add program to update the data across all CIDs. (web terminal)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPLOTQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, change qty2ship to lot on hand qty after lot is entered. (Manual ship and project ship). For use on Ship Sales Order and Project Shipping screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPNONEGLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works like SHIPNONEGQTYS. If set check for neg qty when using serial/lot items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPNONEGQTYS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Does not allow a user to ship a stock item and make it&amp;#039;s owner/warehouse/heldfor/location qty a negative qty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPOUTALT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows import of custom MBS SHIP.OUT file defined on ECR 33602.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPSOBOL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, prompt to create BOL after shipping SO  (ShipSO screen only).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPSOINVOICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Creates an invoice as soon as shipment is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPSONEGRET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHIPSONEGRET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPTOREQ1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, requires user to enter in a Shipping Contact Name, Email and Phone number when using the Red Plus Ship To add on a Quote or Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPTOREQTAXTABLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a tax table to be filled out before allowing a save of the shipto and addshipto screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWASSETQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show new AssetQty on RTASSET table, AssetQty on task grid on project screen, and Complete count field on Project Master Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCIDNAME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Show CID Name on Desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays cost field on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCUSTABC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Display the Customer ABC Code on the Quote and Sales Order header. Display the codes next to customer name on both screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCUSTCAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will display customer type under the billto section of the Sales Order screen (CustCategories exist for billto, soldto and shipto. These are checked in order, the last one filled out will be displayed under billto).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCUSTPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays customer&amp;#039;s price on item lookup instead of List Price. Price shown in the list box is actual price setup in contract or pricing matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWHOURBAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWHOURBAR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWKEY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWKEY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWLOCATION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and printing packing list, find location of 1 carton the line is packed in, and show in cursor as &amp;quot;location&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWLOCTION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWLOCTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWMDS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWMDS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWPAAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWPAAGE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWREMARK1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, add rfqmast.remarks to end of note for appr/decline emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWSUSPECTONENTADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Display Suspect after adding new company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWTASKASSET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This option enables a screen that allows you to swap out or replace assets at a location.  If you add an item with the asset attribute to the Material tab of Time and Material Entry (QUICKTIME), the Asset Update screen will display.  The Asset Update screen will display any other assets for the Ship To location of the task that match the Type of the asset being added. If the remove option is selected, the selected asset&amp;#039;s current location is updated to the CID&amp;#039;s default Organization.   Any entries in the RFID and Serial 2 fields of the Asset Update screen will update the RFID and Serial 2 fields for any remaining assets displayed in the grid.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWTOBONORG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWTOBONORG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWWAITBOXES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWWAITBOXES&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWWARNING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically displays any warning notes attached to the organization when entering SO/PO/TASK/etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWWEBEXP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, clicking on VIEW in Pending approvals will launch in browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLEBAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Single Inventory Package in System&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLEEMAIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - In Message Control, the system will send one email to multiple recipients instead of one email per recipient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLEPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - One Production Work Order per Line Item on SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLETASKLINE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow user to transfer single lines from Task to Task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLOTLINE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add field to cursor (lserial), has lot and CofO data for lot controlled items if CombinleLike items is enabled, and SINGLOTLINE CID option is set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGSERLINE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Group serial lines back together on invoice.  Serials are in LSerial field in cursor.  Make same change to PDF maker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SKIPALLOC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPAUTONUMBER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled and SO/PO number is blank, autonumber is ran without prompt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPCALCWIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skip WIP lookup during processing of grid .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPCOOPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Country of Origin not required on PO Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPINVDIFF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then don&amp;#039;t run InvDiff Check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPNOINPUT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppress the No inputs assigned message for non stock item during assembly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPNOLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - For PWO which would not auto assign non stock material lines that are not linked to PO&amp;#039;s (just skip over them). System will still auto assign linked PO items once received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPPACKLISTPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Packing list not required on PO Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPPWLABOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to skip posting window check when adding labor lines on main timesheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPQTYCHKSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Bypasses the Quantity Check pop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPREPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppresses the Reprice function for time entries. This should be used in environments where tasks are only used for Time &amp;amp; Cost tracking purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPSELOOKUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, skip the Interplant SE lookup on PWO assembly when Plant&amp;lt;&amp;gt;SHipWhse, and on Transfer PO receipts when using Temp Whse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPSELOOKUPW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, prevents produced items from automatically being placed on an interplant shipping event in cases where the shipping warehouse is different from the producing warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPSFLAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, skips the query to determine if an item has been sold before when searching for an item on the SO screen and NEWITEMLOOKUP is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTASSEMEVERY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, it allows partially assemble production lines from Connex. If this option is not enabled, Adjutant will wait until Connex data matches up to the full quantity of the production line before the assembly process takes place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTCOILCHANGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will print a new coil tag for the coil being used on every coil change from Connex. Connex must be using the API integration for this to work correctly. The AMSPRINTER rule needs to fill out to set where the tag prints, and the machine information on the part needs to be filled out correctly as well.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTCOMM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If SMARTCOMM option set, don&amp;#039;t check Product and Machine, but do check Machine Name and Profile.  Hide un-needed fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTCOMPANY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the first variable in the job line is the company name instead of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTSKIPNOINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This is used with Connex integration. If set, will prevent the assembly and complete of a work order line if there is no inventory match on the material that Connex uses. This will prevent users from shipping the order and allow them to correct the usage before it is invoiced. This would mean that material would need to be correct and existing in the proper warehouse to be used from Connex. Otherwise, the line will remain open. Anything that has a coil match, even if there is not enough on hand to fulfill the usage will process normally.  Bundle tags will not print if the line is not correctly assembled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTNEG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with SMARTCOMM rollformer integration.  Allows SmartComm to record coil usage into the negative to show actual quantity used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTUSE6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with SMARTCOMM rollformer integration.  When enabled, this option will assemble items tied to adjustments in SmartComm (tcode=6). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTUSE6USAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with SMARTCOMM rollformer integration.  When enabled, this option will send adjustments (tcode=6) from SmartComm to Adjutant with other usage transactions. The SMARTUSE6 option must also be enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTSLASH1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Eliminates the slashes (/) in the SmartComm data from being sent to the controller.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTZEROBATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, Adjutant will account for Connex usage that gets sent back to Adjutant with 0 batch numbers. This will be counted as usage in Adjutant, but will not be assigned to an order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMSONLYONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, only the contact listed on the sales order header will receive text message updates.  More information on text message updates can be found [[HOW TO Send Out Text Message Updates for a Sales Order | here.]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMTPLOG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SMTPLOG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOADDCUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, adds new blue plus button to create new customer with soldto/billto/shipto attributes. Alter addshipto screen to allow create of billto and sold attributes. Add Price Group dropdown in running in newcust mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOADDOHF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option that will auto-add missing OHF record. If enabled, stk item does not need to setup in the currnt OHF to be used.  Will be added by system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOALLOCATEFULL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allocate whole lot qty when checked on SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOASKPRODQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to change production quantities when submitting a sales order to production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOAUTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will make SO Printing default to SOAUTO- attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOAUTOCLOSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and no open lines, SO will be closed, else it will be left open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOAUTOCLOSE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will check each linked sales order for open lines, if none found, the SO will be closed, if some found, the count will be displayed, and the user will be asked if they want to close the sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOAUTOPRINTPACK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then change tool tip on S2P button to &amp;quot;Submit to Plant&amp;quot;, also launch Print SO screen in Packing list mode after generation of PWOs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOBASECOSTL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, show a new basecostL field in place of the normal cost field in edit mode. (Field is always readonly since basecostL cannot be changed once the line is saved.) If option is enabled, use basecostL value in Line margin calc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOBLOCKBOMS2P&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, do not allow SOs with BOM in the number to go to production (WO Transfer screen will not allow transfer of items that have gone to production, so if the S2P before transfer, they cannot be transferfed later)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOBOMCUSTEDIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to edit a custom BOM even after production has been completed once sent to production. This is typically needed when dealing with sub-assemblies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCANMAKEAVAIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the &amp;quot;Can Make&amp;quot; function on the S2P screen to use the available quantity instead of the on hand quantity when determining if there is enough inventory to produce the associated Sales Order lines. This will ignore inventory owners and will use the sum of the available quantity from Warehouse/HeldFor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCASHBAL2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will calculate the cash balance on the Sales Order Header screen by taking the balance from the line items (which is a total unshipped amount) + any invoices or POS payments totals taken on the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHANGEPGROUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to change the customer price group per line on the sales order or quote.  When choosing the pricing option a prompt will ask the user if they want to update all the lines on the order to the new price group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHKTAXDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents saving Sales Order or Quote lines if the Tax Exempt date on the Ship To record of the order is expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCFIXEDBASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the Item Master Base Cost when SOCFIXEDPRICE is also enabled and the configurable item does not have a cost adjustment defined. This will allow using the Margin Calculator to assign a discount % for configurable lines before they have been produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCFIXEDPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The controlling quantity price adjustment is set to the customer&amp;#039;s contract price. Other configuration options do not affect the price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKBUYOUT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then show warning popup of save of buyout item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKCOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CID option to check to ensure COD amount is filled out if terms are COD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKCUSTPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check for duplicate Customer PO on header check. Warn if found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKPOSEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, checks for PO,ADD security before enabling the GenPO button on SO Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKSTBT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, warns user if the sold to organization is different than the bill to organization upon saving a sales order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKSTOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check to see if items can be produced based on existing inventory and qtyord production.  Fill out new columns in S2P and SetBundle Screens.  Warn on submit if items cannot be made.  Create PWOCM-XX-YYYY event  (xx = dept, yyyy = whse name)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKTAXRATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to SO to check for tax rate not matching current tax rate.  Display message box if different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKWT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If setand line has unitw2 =0 and a SOC question with RCode = W, then stop S2P and notify user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHIDECONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change itemswap logic to ignore the question matchup if SOCHIDECONFIG is on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCOSTADJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use COSTADJ data from SOC to build basecost for Config Type items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCPQUICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The price field on the Quick Line Item Entry tab of the Sales Order may be edited when entering line items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCUTCHARGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Calc cut charge for sales order lines, and add new line to SO.  Create setup screen to control logic used to generate cut charge. SOCUTCHARGE setup option enables logic. Add to RFQ screen also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFALLNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SODEFALLNOTE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFCERTS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Options (SODEFCERTS and SODEFMTRS) to default the matching checkbox to checked on new order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFCPU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then default the CPU option to be checked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFMTRS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Options (SODEFCERTS and SODEFMTRS) to default the matching checkbox to checked on new order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFPACKING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Sales Order print screen to the Packing List option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOFORCECOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will force COD amount to match OrderAmt if COD terms are set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOFRTCHARGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Calc Frt Charge line based on line items on SO, add new line to SO; Change logic to use Rule to setup charges.  Rule supplies item, price (optional), and FT or LBS flag.  Rule setup is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*text1 = item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*num1 = price (if filled out, else comes from getprice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log1 = LBS flag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log2 = FT flag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log3 = Qty = 1 flag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item needs to exist, LBS or FT flag needs to be set.  If QTy = 1 set, line will have qty = 1, otherwise qty will be the total lbs or ft.  Setup option SOFRTCHARGE enables logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOHIDECONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the SOC box does not popup (items are treated like they do not have configs).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOHIDEGM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hides the Gross Margin field on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOHIDEPICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Remove Pick button from SO screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOHIDEPRICEADJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hides the Price Adjustment of each configuration on the Item Configuration screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOITEMBOXSKIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skips the List/Add/Re&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOITEMEXACT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - An exact match on item lookup will always pull up the item, even if there are other possible matches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLABELDIFF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allow the use of SO type template labels from PrintSO Label screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLABELMANY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Label counts default to quantity ordered on Print SO Labels screen. Defaults to 1 if not set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLABELQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set show extra column to have qty to print on label. Change the Print SO Label screen to add a column for OPEN item quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLABELQTY2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to keep new qty on label qty, but default to qtyorder instead of qtyopen. See Setup Options Wiki for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLCODEREQONTIMEENTRY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a solution code on time entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLDTOREQAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require an Account Manager on the Soldto screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLDTOREQSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require a Salesperson on the Soldto screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLDTOUPDATEAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the AM on linked SO and invoices are updated when the Soldto AM is changed. Only items with linked Shipto AM set to blank are updated. Shipto AM takes priority if set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLDTOZONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, Zone is pulled from the SoldTo (District) record rather than the ShipTo (Location) in the Task Entry screen, Reinspection screen, tapping screen, and the Work Order Generator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLINELOADDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - if set, and SOREQLOADDATE is set, then blank line item Load Dates will be updated with Header Load Date.  Occurs on save of sales order and RFQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to lock Account Manager in by organization attribute and not by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKBILLTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, will prevent the Bill to organization from being changed after an invoice or point of sale payment has been made. This can be overridden with special security on the Sales Order screen (UNLOCKBILLTO). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the cost field is always disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKCOSTPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Lock the SO line item cost field from being edited by a user after corresponding line has been assembled in production (partial or full assembly). Option to lock cost field on non-stock production items once qtyassem&amp;lt;&amp;gt;0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKDOLSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, line cannot be edited if dollar shipped.   Change logic to prevent delete of dollar shipped line in all cases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKONS2P&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, edit of SO line is not allowed when line is linked to PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKPRICECHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Lock Price button on SO line entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to lock Sales Person in by organization attribute and not by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOMANUALNUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, suppresses autonumber function when saving a SO. Users will always have to manually key in a SO number if this option is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOMCSTDCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Controls which cost is used (set for standard cost) with the EXTMARGIN setup option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOMULTIWHSEALERT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SO lines that are shipping from a warehouse different than the SO Header warehouse will be highlighted in yellow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOMUSTSAVEHEADER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces the SO Header to be saved before continuing on to the Line Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONEXT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add button to SO screen to allow generation of order with next items in chain.  Next item is saved on itemmaster screen on Alt Description tab.  Logic will copy sales order, change SO type (based on sonexttype rule) and swap out items with next item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOAMGSHIPTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SONOAMGSHIPTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOCOPY1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then blank out priority and comment on copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOCOPYASSETTAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then don&amp;#039;t copy AcctMgr from shipto, and revert back to soldto acct manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONODUPPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and SOCHECKCUSTPO set, then when duplicate CustPO found, order cannot be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOEXACT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Only accepts an exact match of the Sales Order number on the SO Shipping screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOLISTZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to not allow line save if list price is zero and item is in PriceGroup = NETSTEEL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOPRICENAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the Price Nag window on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOQUICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the Quick Line Item Entry tab on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOTEMPLATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the template box is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONUMPOSTFIX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SONUMPOSTFIX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPACKLINE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SOPACKLINE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPACKPICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will show a grid before printing the packing list to allow the user to select the lines to print, and the qty to print (qtyopen)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPLISTDCODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will sort Packing Lists for Component orders in Dept code order instead of dept name order.  Make same change in PDF Maker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPLUSPLUSUNLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will allow entering a different SOC price than the previously entered price after using the ++ button on a Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPLUSPLUSV2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables new ++ shortcut logic for copying custom BOM details.  Applies to both the RFQ and SO screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPOBOMNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, include BOM line inote in PO line note for generated items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPOORDERNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;-  Copies the Order # text from a Sales Order to the Order # on the Purchase Order when a Purchase Order is created directly from a Sales Order. The PO Order# update only works on the create new PO function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPOQUEST3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Custom grid-style version of the GenPO screen called from the SO.             &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPRINTCHNGORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will call the changeorder screen from the print button on sor3 and pass the project number and SO number when num2 of the SOTYPE rule is equal to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPRINTCOA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add button to PrintSO screen to print COAs for selected SOs based on allocated lots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPRINTLOTQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set add the qty into the lotalloc field  LOT# (QTY).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPRINTMERGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Merge the line items from the entered sales order range into a single sales order for printing  (the first SO is used as the master).  Merge runs when Merge Checkbox is checked, and setup option checks box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPWOCHGDDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Due Date on the Production Work Order according to the Load Date on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPWOPOCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If enabled, show new warning message if a Produced Buyout line has been partially sent to production or placed on a Purchase Order and the user tries to Purchase or Produce the line again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPWODELETE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, display a message that the linked PWO will be deleted if a user tries to edit a line that has already been sent to production. Editing is only allowed if the PWO line has no usage or assignments. The S2P status for the line will be reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOQEORDNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - New set up option, SOQEORDNO, If enabled, will allow user to quick edit the Order No field by double clicking on the Orderno Label which will put the field into edit mode. The field will be automatically saved when hitting Enter, or clicking out of the field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQLOADDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, load date is required before header save (estdate)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a PO# to be entered for every sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQREQDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to require REQdate before save of SO, and Convert of RFQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQSALESTEAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires the Sales Team attribute be filled out for the Customer/Order Type of the SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shipping Event required on Sales Order. (Shipping Event is always required if multi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQSHIPADDR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ship To address on Sales Order header must have Address, City, State, and Zip Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQTAXTABLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ship To address on Sales Order must have a valid tax table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORESETDROPSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set the dropship flag will reset to no on each line item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORESETLINECHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, overrides the default behavior of the Hide Line and Hide Price flags in the Sales Order screen by clearing the flags on each new line entry. (Use option RFQRESETLINECHK for the Sales Order screen).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORESETSOCCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use basecost if &amp;gt;0, or lstcost2 from itemdet as source of cost data for configurable items with controlling qtys.  Basecost should be set in selling units in this case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORETURNBOM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SORETURNBOM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORTBYPORDER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SORTBYPORDER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSAVENOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the contents of all the notes (Sales Order) boxes will be saved to a text file every 5 seconds when the notes are being edited. Txt files are saved in the TmpSONote folder, with SO-CID if so has number, else is UserID-CID-DateStamp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSCANUPC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables scanning an item&amp;#039;s UPC code to place it on a sales order.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSEPICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, disable pick button on SO screen to force use of pick button on SE screen.  If not set, disable pick button on SE screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSEPSOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows for more than 10 SOC questions to be loaded in the SOC screen and answered in Order Entry.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSETSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Default User in Salesperson dropdown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSETSPBLANK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and soldto and shipto SP are blank, and current user is a SP, use current user as SP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWCASHBAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then show new cash balance field which is order amt - cash/cc paid amount (on first header tab). Field is updated on SO load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWCONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SOSHOWCONFIG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWLASTREV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses &amp;quot;last revision&amp;quot; logic on sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWSBOX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SOSHOWSBOX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWCPU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to show/hide CPU checkbox. If CPU checkbox is checked, then use whse taxtable as taxtable unless shipto or soldto is exempt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWSIMPREV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses Simple Revision logic on sales order (most popular option).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWWAIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SOSHOWWAIT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSINGLESHIPTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically updates all lines on sales order with Ship To entered on header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSKIPDSQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Drop ship box disabled on quick add tab if selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSOABIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setup option allows printing the bin on sales order forms for any allocations on the sales order (expression on the form is &amp;#039;C_sodetail.soabin&amp;#039;).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSTARTADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Starts the Sales Order screen in Add mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSWAPITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add item swap capability to quote screen.  Apply SOSWAPITEM setup logic to the RFQ screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSWAPITEMC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - During Item Swap, warns user if original item has already been packed in a carton, and notifies if there is insufficient quantity of the new item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSWAPPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Swap location of sell pricing unit and selling price. Update selling price if selling price unit is changed. Use selling price unit as unit when calcuating selling price using getprice logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSWAPRP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show a &amp;#039;Reprice&amp;#039; checkbox in Line Item View, and only reprice items with &amp;#039;Reprice&amp;#039; box checked during swap. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOUPDATELIKE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will ask users to update price for all like items if the price for a line is updated in the Line Item View grid on the Sales Order screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOUPDATEPOQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When updating the SO of non-stock items tied to a PO, the PO quanitities need to reflect the changes automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOUPSPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If set, will recalculate the sell price based every time the sell pricing unit is changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOVOIDPOCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and SO has linked POS, do not allow void.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SPLITBASICSRV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - if set, break all basic service items into new group (Basic Service, code = B) Make new subtotal values  (extcostB and extpriceB).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SPWOBYLINENO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and SINGLEPWO is enabled, PWO will have SONO-Linenumber as WONO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SSAVGCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Slow Stock Rpt &amp;#039;Avg Cost Logic&amp;#039; is checked by default and the report uses AY, MI, and PR transactions to age the remaining stock inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STAXCOCAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Updates the Sales Tax Due report to break out the county tax rates based on taxable caps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STKADJUSTGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add GL account to Adjust screen. If filled out, this account is used in place of IC Clearing account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUBSTOAMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows S2P to send sub-assemblies to AMS/Connex integration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUBSTKCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Check for sub assembly inventory on hand before making PWOs for new ones. If there is not enough inventory, create sub-PWO for quantity needed to fulfill the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPRESSBNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppresses the &amp;quot;Copy to Billing Notes&amp;quot; question on the Time Entry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUSPECT_MCLC_REQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Market Seg, Customer Type, Lead Source, Credit Limit required on Suspect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SVRORDLOCKBILL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and srvord has  been billed, Time/Mat/Equip cannot be added to timesheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWAPPRICEFLD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SWAPPRICEFLD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWAPSERIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Swap serial numbers in itemtrack and cost tier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWI&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setup option will enable SWI database linking for SWI Marksman/Roper Whitney integration. Contact your consultant to begin the integration process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===T===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAPLIMITBUILDER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TAPLIMITBUILDER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAPSINGLETASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, service orders created from the Tap Setup screen for the same address will have unique service order numbers instead of the same service order with a different letter suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASK2PO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show the PO button on the Material tab of Task Master. If clicked, run the full Generate PO Process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKADDBUILDER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If set and the + button is used to create a ShipTo for a task that is linked to the project, a parent/child relationship will be created with the SoldTo of the project if the organization has the Builder Attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKADDSUBDIV:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If set and the + button is used to create a ShipTo for a task that is linked to the project, a parent/child relationship will be created with the Subdivision organization from the Project Customers tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKBLANKPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Clears out Customer PO field on original task when using the Recurring Task Generator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAPSHOWWARN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and address has a warning note, show note in popup box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKCHECKADUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TASKCHECKADUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKCHECKCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If there is no time entry(labor,material,equip), give warning to user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKDEFWORKING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prints the Working Form of a Task by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKDUEAT5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, duedate will be set to 5pm for route generated tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKHIDEECRB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then hide the ECR button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKHIDESEND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then hide send dropdown and button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKIGNOREZONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ignores the Zone Resource attribute restriction (this requires the resource to have the same zone as the task).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKLOCKTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then task field is locked during edit. When enabled, do not allow editing of the Task  field after task has been saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKMATCHSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and one of the allowed billto&amp;#039;s matches the shipto, then use that billto&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKNEWSEQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the TASK counter in CID Maintenance instead of the SONO counter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKNEWWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to disable Select WO combo box and button (Always create a new one)  CID option is TASKNEWWO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKNODEPTLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Any Department can perform any Standard Task; there is no required link between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKOLDMA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to make task screen work in old simple mode (3 fields for manual address, no special shipto needed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKPLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables the Lock checkbox on the Material tab of the Task Entry screen. The Lock checkbox is used to bypass the pricing program in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables the Price field on the Material tab of the Task Entry screen. Users can edit this field when this setup option is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKQUESTBIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - User Defined Questions on tasks are popped up in new window when task is entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKQUOTE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, display the new Quote dropdown on the task master.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKQUOTEPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, a PDF version of the quote linked to the task will be saved in the task document vault when the task is initially saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKREQZONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires the Zone field to be filled out before saving task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKS2P&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enable, will display the S2P button on the Material tab of the Task Master screen to allow creating PWOs from Tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKSKIPCPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the Customer PO# field on the Task Entry Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKSKIPDAYS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When creating a new assignment for a task, the day after the last assignment is used as the default schedule date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKSUBSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, display the Subcon Service checkbox on the Generate Purchase Orders For screen if called from a task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKTASKCR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and the standard task is changed during edit, generate a new CR event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXFREIGHTSTATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change SO screen to look at state rule to set taxable flag on FRT type items (log4)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXINACTWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will show a new Include Inactive Warehouses checkbox on the Sales Tax Due report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXOVERLAYALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change logic to allow other states to use overlays. Put tax cap percent in state rule. If whse has overlay, and shipto in same state, overlay will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXPICKINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the &amp;#039;Select Invoices to Process&amp;#039; option on the Sales Tax Due Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXRECALCLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TAXRECALCLIST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXRETAINAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then base retainage on the total amount (including tax), instead of the net amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXRETAINAGE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then tax is calculated on invoice amount less retainage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXSPEC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to zero out some UseTax Rates. CO-City and County Rates. NM-All but State&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXSPLITBYCOUNTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Rearranges the city tax to display split out by the county on the Sales Tax Due report. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXTABLES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sales Tax Tables are used and tax rate field on Ship To screen is disabled, tax table must be used in order to obtain a tax rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXTABLESORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TAXTABLESORT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TERMSERVER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TERMSERVER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TESTEMAILNONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Options to control system wide email sending from blind send points.  TESTNOEMAIL does not send email at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TESTEMAILSELF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Options to control system wide email sending from blind send points.  TESTEMAILSELF emails back to running user, or abistest@abiscorp.com if no running user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TGLIKELOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the Like checkbox on the task grid is checked by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TMPREPORTFOLDER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, MAKEREPORT uses c:\adjtemp as target for COPY TO command when making temp copies of report forms.  These files are then copied to correct temp folder using COPY FILE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TRANSALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and the lot controlled item has SOALLOCATE lines, then transfer the lines to the new OHF record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TRIMXLS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -If enabled, then trim the trailing spaces out of the data before exporting it to excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Time and Material Entry screen opens in ADD mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCHECKHOURS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks time entries against Block Contracts (prepaid hours or dollars). If exceeded or approaching, warns the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCHECKONHAND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks current on hand quantities when entering material in the Time and Material Entry screen. Warns user if qty entered is greater than qty on hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCHECKPOLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, require all linked POs to be received or closed before locking task is allowed. Remove CID setup option CHKTSPOLNK to allow tasks to be completed with open POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCHKOVERLAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Use smin and emin to check for overlaps. Change warning to option to cancel entry and change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[TSCHECKOVERLAP2 | TSCHKOVERLAP2]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works the same way as TSCHKOVERLAP, but has a security token with it that will disallow saving the overlapping time entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cursor starts in Completed By field on Time and Material Entry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCOPYTASKNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, copy the task note into the timesheet notes box.  If solution code is used, and it has a note and cutrent timesheet note is not empty, prompt to Overwrite, Append or Do Nothing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSEXTRAFLAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, items with the new TASKFLATRATE item attribute will be billed along with the Flat Rate of the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSFORCESPELL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces a spell checks on time entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSGETPOLINES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When LoadMat button is clicked, loads all linked PO lines into Materials tab of Time and Material Entry screen. PO line may be linked directly to Task, or indirectly linked through the Project or to a Sales Order linked to the Project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSGETPOLINESDUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change LoadMat button to transfer all items each time button is clicked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSINCALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the reprice function will split time entry lines that overlap between regular time and overtime before applying increment logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and REQCOMPSVRORD  (Complete Required before billing) is enabled, once task is billed, it cannot be unlocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSMAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Time and Material Entry screen opens with Material tab selected instead of Labor tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSMATITEMORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Items are loaded into the Time and Material Entry screen in Item Code order when the LoadMat button is clicked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSNODRIVETIME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the DT (Drive Time) button on Time and Material Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSNOEQUIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hide fields on labor tab that relate to equipment/assets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSNOREPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TSNOREPRICE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSONHAND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, type ahead options on the material tab of time entry are limited to only show materials that are on-hand/non-stock for that warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSPRINTING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then map selected PWO printers back to current TS printer names when printing. (PWOPRINTER must also be on)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSPRINTPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Print Working/Complete buttons for a task record launch the PDF Viewer and use PDFMaker to print the forms from Adjutant 20/20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSPRODONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TSPRODONLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSQTYFROMTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Load Materials function on Time Entry will use the Quantities entered on the Materials Tab of the Task Master screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSHOWAVG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TSSHOWAVG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSHOWPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add Project ID to Header of screen. If set, change caption of TimeSheet to TS:99999 where 99999 is prooject ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSPLITTIME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and time &amp;gt; resource def hours per day is entered (just hours, not start/stop), time will be split into  def hours per day blocks, using working calendar for dates.  If no working calendar, M-F will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSTARTSTOP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, force user to enter time with start and stop time and calculate the duration and grey out total field. Change the time format javascript code to accept 0355 pm as 3:55 pm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSTOCKMATL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then only allow entry of stock items on material tab of time entry.  Do not show Is non stock question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TUESDAYWEEK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Resource Pay Hours Summary report to calculate overtime based on Tuesday - Monday weeks instead of Sunday - Saturday weeks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TWOLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change logic to print all 1st labels in single loop using g_invdiff, then print all 2nd lables using g_invdiff2a.  Log labels printed to new labellog table.  2nd label still enabled with TWOLABEL option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===U===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UBERLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - UBERLABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNCHKLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uncheck Load Locked Only box on Billing screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNCHKNOBILL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uncheck Nobill Printing Option on Approve/Edit Billing Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNLOADCHKTRAN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, prevents unloading cartons from a top level carton on an Interplant Shipping Event if the cartons have purple transfer lines in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNLOADDEFWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Defaults the logged in user&amp;#039;s warehouse to the &amp;quot;Unload At&amp;quot; warehouse dropdown on the Unload Carton screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNLOCKOTHER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - UNLOCKOTHER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNPOCHECKOWNER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables new fields and an ownership check process for the Unbilled PO Receipt Report cursor to show the Current Owner and Transfer Date for lot controlled items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPBASENITE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add process to niteinvcheck to update base cost with avg cost for all items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPDATEBAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When selected, upon transfer using the SE transfer or transfers and adjustments screen, the item will retain the original trackno (or P#), allowing the user to keep the same labels and barcodes for the item. This option will not work if SETRANS is being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPDATEBCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Update Base Cost on Item if Receipt cost is higher than current cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPDATEBCOSTBOTH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Update Base Cost on Item if Receipt cost is higher or lower than current cost. Item must have the UPBCOSTBOTH item attribute. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPDATEDUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ask to Update Due Date on Task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USAGEMOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Includes a sum of Mod In - Mod Out qty in usage calculations. This will allow users to see usage from coils that get modded into slits or flat sheets. Subtracting out the Mod Out will cancel out any freight/paint cost modding to the coil since the Mod In will equal the Mod Out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USAGESELLCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add logic to calculate the number of times sold (Number of unique Orders for matching S type Itemact records). CID option USAGESELLCOUNT enables logic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USE2FA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables two-factor authentication for logging in to Adjutant 20/20. Users must have a Mobile phone number filled out on their contact record. When attempting to log in, the user will be prompted to enter a 6 digit code and they will receive a text with the code to enter. A code will only need to be entered once every 30 days per device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEADVPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - USEADVPDF&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEAFI&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add AssetType dropdown to Route Details tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEBINS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Bins added to Ship SO, PWO Yields and inputs.  USEBINS is Setup Option control.  lbinname is label caption code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEBOMBCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - USEBOMBCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USECC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Use credit card processing screens if installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEINVFORM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then INVFORM from Invoice header is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEMSNASSONO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces Sales Order number to match Project number in auto&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEMULTICURR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - USEMULTICURR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USERISSQL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use Adjutant Userid as part of SQL UserID used to log into sql server  (if using SQL logins).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USETSYS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - USETSYS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEWCARD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables credit card integration with Heartland processors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===V===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VERBROSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Turns on the Verbose Checker on Time entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VINTAGEUPLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - VINTAGEUPLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VTERMEXTRA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - VTERMEXTRA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VTERMMAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - VTERMMAX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VTERMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - VTERMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VTIMECLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Virtual Timeclock on Schedule if Resource name is double&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===W===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WARNDUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prompts a possible duplicate login message to allow users to abandon the possible duplicate login, and find the original logged in session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WCHARDLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add CID option to set filter on Base query to sotype = &amp;#039;B&amp;#039; ro sotype = &amp;#039;M&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WEBDISPLAY2DECIMALS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - WEBDISPLAY2DECIMALS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WEBLASTSTOP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows user/resource&amp;#039;s last stop time (sotran.stop) from a time entry TODAY. Display this time where the date normally resides as &amp;quot;Last Stop: XX:YY AM/PM&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WHSEACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change Whse screen to allow entry of accts for owners. Create new class to get correct accts from OHF/WhseAcct/CID. Add logic to PO Rec to GL block of super batch. Add code to all other Inv/WIP prcesses in Superbatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WHSEFILTERDEFUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the logged in user&amp;#039;s default warehouse as the default Warehouse for the Quote, Sales Order and Project Grids along with the Customer Statement, Daily Invoice Summary, and Invoice Register Reports. It will also apply the same logic to any block in Adjutant 2020 that has a Warehouse filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WOGENSINGLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Work Order Generator will generate tasks with unique task/work order numbers instead of using the same task number with different letters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WORLDSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Added new WorldShip interface screen to communicate back and forth with WS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===X===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;XAUPLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Read Process runs as part of FoxProcess.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Payable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Setup Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Master_-_Attributes&amp;diff=5939</id>
		<title>Item Master - Attributes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Master_-_Attributes&amp;diff=5939"/>
		<updated>2025-08-01T16:01:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Master&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item Attributes are maintained in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Rule Maintenance]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; screen under Item Attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Item_Master_Attribute.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fields/Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Asset:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want an asset to be created in the Asset Information screen every time you receive the item.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An item with this attribute must be a stock item and serialized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOM (Bill of Material):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item contains a bill of material.  The Bill of Material Master window will open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUYINQB (Force to Buy in QB):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute will force the item to the Purchase module of Quick Buy, even if marked as produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUYCONFIG:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute can be put on an item that&amp;#039;s on the BOM of a configurable part.  This will order the BOM item (the one with the BUYCONFIG attribute) when the user selects the &amp;#039;PO&amp;#039; button from a sales order containing the configurable part.  The raw materials from the BOM will be combined on the PO (one line per item).  This is meant to work with items that are stocked in the same way they are configured (driven by the controlling quantity on the configuration screen).  So if the item on the BOM is controlled by the Length question, the raw material is meant to have a stocking unit of FT.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COA (Certificate of Analysis):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This attribute is intended for hazardous materials.  When this attribute is added to a lot-controlled item, it adds a jump screen to each lot (accessible by clicking on a lot in the #Lot tab of Item Master) that holds specific information about that lot.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Coil Lot&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Activates a jump screen to Coil Defaults when attribute is saved. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Coil Defaults&amp;#039;&amp;#039; screen is used to catagorize in detail the specifics of each coil type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CW (Catch-Unit Item):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item has a catch unit associated with it, must be a stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do Not Update BCost on Receipt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the base cost of the item to remain fixed, no matter what price the item is received at.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Freight Type Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item to be flagged as a freight item on any sales order or invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOCKSOCPRICE (Lock Config Price):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute locks in the configuration price for the item and does not allow any edits to the configurable pricing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify, Base:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is a base for modifications, must be a stock item. This attribute is required to modify the item in the Modification Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify, Add-in:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is an add-in for modifications on the base items. This attribute is required to modify the item in the Modification Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPWOASSLABEL (No Label on Assembly):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute to suppress production labels from being printed when item is produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Labels (PONOLABEL):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you do not want any barcode labels to be printed when the item is received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Packing Type Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item to be flagged as a packing item on any sales order or invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POGROUP###:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This attribute - where &amp;#039;###&amp;#039; is a number - can place items on separate purchase orders when they are ordered at the same time.  For example items with &amp;#039;PO Group 001&amp;#039; will be placed on the first generated PO and items with &amp;#039;PO Group 002&amp;#039; will be on a second purchase order.  The name (text 1) on the Item Attributes rule follows the format of &amp;#039;POGROUP###&amp;#039; where ### denotes the number.  For example, POGROUP001. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRICEMATRIX:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Allows users to use thePrice Matrix Screen to price the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODLABELQTY:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Prints one production label per qty to make on the production work order.  For example, if the PWO is for 20 of an item, then this attribute will print 20 labels.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWO2PO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Used for buyouts of produced items.  This attribute will force an item on the BOM of a sales order line to a PO from the sales order.  For example, let&amp;#039;s say there is an item called PRODBEAM that goes to the shop for production.  On the BOM of that PRODBEAM item is a buyout called BUYOUTBEAM.  If you add PRODBEAM to a sales order then select the PO button from the sales order screen, the BUYOUTBEAM will display in the Create Purchase Order screen.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOWARN:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Suppress the message for specific items during the S2P process that warns the user that some items cannot be produced with current stock levels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQLINKPO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will not allow an item to be shipped on a sales order unless it has been linked to a purchase order and that purchase order has been properly received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWMOD:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will display Modification Processor when this item is added to a Purchase Order.  For more information refer to the [Processing-PO|Processing PO] page.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SO Use Required&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; During SO line entry the Use field must be filled out before you can save the line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOC (Sales Order Configurator Setup):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is configurable.  The Product Configurator will allow the user to set up the possible configurations of the item, should not be a stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOISLOTNO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This can be added to lot controlled items so that the lot number that is assigned during the PO receipt is the same as the linked sales order.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWI:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute contains the jump screen (AMSPROD) and will flag the system to push data to SWI machines (to be used with the SWI setup option and rule. Contact your consultant for more information on integration setup with SWI).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPBCOST:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item&amp;#039;s base cost to be updated when a PO is received with a price higher than the current base cost.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPBCOSTBOTH:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute will update the item&amp;#039;s base cost when a PO is received.  The difference between this and the UPBCOST attribute is the UPBCOST attribute will only adjust it if the PO receipt cost is higher than the current base cost.  The UPBCOSTBOTH attribute will also adjust the item&amp;#039;s base cost if the last received cost is lower than the current base cost.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use System Flag for BCost Update:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this attribute if you want the default system setting to decide the base cost update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Item Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Master_-_Attributes&amp;diff=5938</id>
		<title>Item Master - Attributes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Master_-_Attributes&amp;diff=5938"/>
		<updated>2025-08-01T15:47:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: /* General Description */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Master&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item Attributes are maintained in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Rule Maintenance]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; screen under Item Attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Item_Master_Attribute.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fields/Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Asset:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want an asset to be created in the Asset Information screen every time you receive the item.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An item with this attribute must be a stock item and serialized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOM (Bill of Material):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item contains a bill of material.  The Bill of Material Master window will open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUYINQB (Force to Buy in QB):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute will force the item to the Purchase module of Quick Buy, even if marked as produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUYCONFIG:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute can be put on an item that&amp;#039;s on the BOM of a configurable part.  This will order the BOM item (the one with the BUYCONFIG attribute) when the user selects the &amp;#039;PO&amp;#039; button from a sales order containing the configurable part.  The raw materials from the BOM will be combined on the PO (one line per item).  This is meant to work with items that are stocked in the same way they are configured (driven by the controlling quantity on the configuration screen).  So if the item on the BOM is controlled by the Length question, the raw material is meant to have a stocking unit of FT.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COA (Certificate of Analysis):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This attribute is intended for hazardous materials.  When this attribute is added to a lot-controlled item, it adds a jump screen to each lot (accessible by clicking on a lot in the #Lot tab of Item Master) that holds specific information about that lot.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Coil Lot&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Activates a jump screen to Coil Defaults when attribute is saved. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Coil Defaults&amp;#039;&amp;#039; screen is used to catagorize in detail the specifics of each coil type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CW (Catch-Unit Item):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item has a catch unit associated with it, must be a stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do Not Update BCost on Receipt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the base cost of the item to remain fixed, no matter what price the item is received at.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Freight Type Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item to be flagged as a freight item on any sales order or invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOCKSOCPRICE (Lock Config Price):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute locks in the configuration price for the item and does not allow any edits to the configurable pricing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify, Base:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is a base for modifications, must be a stock item. This attribute is required to modify the item in the Modification Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modify, Add-in:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is an add-in for modifications on the base items. This attribute is required to modify the item in the Modification Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPWOASSLABEL (No Label on Assembly):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute to suppress production labels from being printed when item is produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Labels (PONOLABEL):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you do not want any barcode labels to be printed when the item is received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Packing Type Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item to be flagged as a packing item on any sales order or invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POGROUP###:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This attribute - where &amp;#039;###&amp;#039; is a number - can place items on separate purchase orders when they are ordered at the same time.  For example items with &amp;#039;PO Group 001&amp;#039; will be placed on the first generated PO and items with &amp;#039;PO Group 002&amp;#039; will be on a second purchase order.  The name (text 1) on the Item Attributes rule follows the format of &amp;#039;POGROUP###&amp;#039; where ### denotes the number.  For example, POGROUP001. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRICEMATRIX:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Allows users to use thePrice Matrix Screen to price the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODLABELQTY:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Prints one production label per qty to make on the production work order.  For example, if the PWO is for 20 of an item, then this attribute will print 20 labels.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWO2PO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Used for buyouts of produced items.  This attribute will force an item on the BOM of a sales order line to a PO from the sales order.  For example, let&amp;#039;s say there is an item called PRODBEAM that goes to the shop for production.  On the BOM of that PRODBEAM item is a buyout called BUYOUTBEAM.  If you add PRODBEAM to a sales order then select the PO button from the sales order screen, the BUYOUTBEAM will display in the Create Purchase Order screen.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOWARN:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Suppress the message for specific items during the S2P process that warns the user that some items cannot be produced with current stock levels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQLINKPO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will not allow an item to be shipped on a sales order unless it has been linked to a purchase order and that purchase order has been properly received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWMOD:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will display Modification Processor when this item is added to a Purchase Order.  For more information refer to the [Processing-PO|Processing PO] page.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SO Use Required&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; During SO line entry the Use field must be filled out before you can save the line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOC (Sales Order Configurator Setup):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if the item is configurable.  The Product Configurator will allow the user to set up the possible configurations of the item, should not be a stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOISLOTNO:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This can be added to lot controlled items so that the lot number that is assigned during the PO receipt is the same as the linked sales order.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWI:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute contains the jump screen (AMSPROD) and will flag the system to push data to SWI machines (to be used with the SWI setup option and rule. Contact your consultant for more information on integration setup with SWI).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPBCOST:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Select this attribute if you want the item&amp;#039;s base cost to be updated when a PO is received with a price higher than the current base cost.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPBCOSTBOTH:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This attribute will update the item&amp;#039;s base cost when a PO is received.  The difference between this and the UPBCOST attribute is the UPBCOST attribute will only adjust it if the PO receipt cost is higher than the current base cost.  The UPBCOSTBOTH attribute will also adjust the item&amp;#039;s base cost if the last received cost is lower than the current base cost.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use System Flag for BCost Update:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this attribute if you want the default system setting to decide the base cost update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5887</id>
		<title>Prompt List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5887"/>
		<updated>2025-07-22T19:12:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Prompts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 4 [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_04_-_Put_Away Put Away / Move]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Used to relocate items within the warehouse from one location/bin to another. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 6 Grouping&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Groups scanned items under a single container or identifier for streamlined handling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 9 Package Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Displays the status and contents of a scanned package. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 10 Move Carton / Container&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Moves an entire carton or container to a new warehouse / bin location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 11 Update Carton / Container&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Allows users to modify attributes or contents of a scanned container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 16 Contents (of carton/box)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Shows the detailed contents inside a selected carton or box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 18 Change Printer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Lets the user switch to a different printer for label or document printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 20 Copy Label&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Generates a duplicate of an existing item or carton label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 23 Inspection Control&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Marks or verifies whether an item or container has passed inspection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 24 Destroy Carton&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Deletes or invalidates a carton and removes it from the inventory system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 29 Packing Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Checks or updates the packing progress or status for a sales or shipping event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 30 What is Here&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Scans a location to view all items currently present there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 31 Physical Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Used to count and reconcile actual on-hand inventory at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 32 Carton Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Lists and audits cartons currently in a specific warehouse location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 34 Change CID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Changes the CID (Company ID) associated with the user&amp;#039;s scanner session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 35 Change Warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Changes the user&amp;#039;s default warehouse context for the scanner session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 36 Scan Document&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Attaches or indexes a scanned document, or initiate document scanning workflows tied to production or shipping tasks. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 37 Carton Count&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Performs a carton-level count for reconciliation during cycle or physical inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 38 Directed Cycle Count&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Initiates a cycle count for a specific item/location directed by system needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 40 Repack / Remove SP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Used to remove special packaging (SP) or repack items into new containers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 41 [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_41-_Bin_Inventory_Transfer Bin Item Transfer]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Transfers a specific item between bins in the same warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 42 Check Coil Allocation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Scan a coil to check if it has been allocated on a sales order or a quote. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 43 AMS Scrap&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Records scrap for items in the AMS process or work center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 45 PWO (Single Item Production)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Logs production one item at a time using a Production Work Order (PWO).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 46 PWO (Multiple Item Production)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Logs production for multiple items with one single input material using a PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 47 PWO Status Check&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Shows current status and history of a Production Work Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 48 Quick Assembly&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Simplifies the process of recording completion of a basic assembly items without using a PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 49 Scrap Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Logs a specific item as scrap and removes it from inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 50 Change Laser Printer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Sets the default laser printer for future prints from the scanner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 52 Hold Control&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Places or releases a system-controlled hold on a scanned item or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 53 Reprint Label&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Reprints the last scanned or selected label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 54 Copy PWO Tag&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Creates a copy of a production tag for tracking or labeling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 55 Print Coil Tag&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Prints a new identification tag for a steel coil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 56 Print Pack List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Prints a packing list for a carton, container, or shipping event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 57 Copy Inventory Label&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Reprints or duplicates an inventory label for an item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 58 [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Barcode_Scanner_-_Prompt_58_-_Cycle_Count Cycle Count]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Starts a cycle count process to verify quantities for selected items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 70 Create Carton&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Opens a new carton record to start building a packed shipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 71 Reprint Carton Label&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Reprints a label for a previously created carton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 72 Item Swap&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Swaps one item for another in a carton or bin (often due to substitution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 73 PO Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Receives items against a purchase order into inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 74 SO Load&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Loads items for a sales order into a carton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 75 Welding Inspection&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Records inspection results for welding operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 76 Reprint Bundle Label&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Reprints labels for bundled products or groups of items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 77 Soft PO Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Receives a PO without physically scanning each item—often used for bulk or indirect receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 78 SE Unpack (unload carton)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Unloads and verifies contents of a shipping event upon arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 79 Load Shipping Event&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Loads cartons/items into a shipping event record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 84 [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_84_-_Recommend_Coil Recommend Coil]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Recommends up to 10 coils to use for the scanned Production Work Order (PWO) line, starting with the oldest coil up to the newest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 86 [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_86_Station_List_-_86_STATION_Rule Assign Station]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Assigns a scanned item or order to a specific workstation or production line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 87 Production Time Prompt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Scan a production line to begin a start/start time for production on that line. The second scan will stop the clock and provide a record displaying the amount of time taken to produce the line. Start/Stop scans are auditable from the Work Order using the ShiftF11 Audit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 88 Cut Production&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Records cutting operation in production workflows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 99 Log out&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Ends the current scanner session for the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prompts No Longer In Use==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CheckIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Pulling Cart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 7&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 8&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 12&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 13&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 14&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 15&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 17&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 19&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Load]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 21&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Add Box to MR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 22&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Where is (item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 25&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy CheckIn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 26&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 27&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Unpack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 28&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Picklist Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 33&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Picks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 39&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SP Load (for SE)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 51&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Restock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 59&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed SE Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 81&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 82&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Wireless Warehouse]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5886</id>
		<title>Prompt List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5886"/>
		<updated>2025-07-22T19:05:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Prompts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_04_-_Put_Away Put Away / Move]:  Used to relocate items within the warehouse from one location/bin to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Grouping:  Groups scanned items under a single container or identifier for streamlined handling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 9&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Package Status:  Displays the status and contents of a scanned package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 10&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Move Carton / Container:  Moves an entire carton or container to a new warehouse / bin location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 11&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Update Carton / Container:  Allows users to modify attributes or contents of a scanned container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 16&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Contents (of carton/box):  Shows the detailed contents inside a selected carton or box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 18&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Printer:  Lets the user switch to a different printer for label or document printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 20&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy Label:  Generates a duplicate of an existing item or carton label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 23&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Inspection Control:  Marks or verifies whether an item or container has passed inspection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 24&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Carton:  Deletes or invalidates a carton and removes it from the inventory system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 29&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing Status:  Checks or updates the packing progress or status for a sales or shipping event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 30&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; What is Here:  Scans a location to view all items currently present there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 31&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Physical Inventory:  Used to count and reconcile actual on:hand inventory at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 32&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Carton Inventory:  Lists and audits cartons currently in a specific warehouse location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 34&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change CID:  Changes the CID (Company ID) associated with the user&amp;#039;s scanner session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 35&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Warehouse:  Changes the user&amp;#039;s default warehouse context for the scanner session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 36&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Scan Document:  Attaches or indexes a scanned document, or initiate document scanning workflows tied to production or shipping tasks. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 37&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Carton Count:  Performs a carton:level count for reconciliation during cycle or physical inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 38&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed Cycle Count:  Initiates a cycle count for a specific item/location directed by system needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 40&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Repack / Remove SP:  Used to remove special packaging (SP) or repack items into new containers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 41&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_41-_Bin_Inventory_Transfer Bin Item Transfer]:  Transfers a specific item between bins in the same warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 42&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check Coil Allocation:   Scan a coil to check if it has been allocated on a sales order or a quote. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 43&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  AMS Scrap:  Records scrap for items in the AMS process or work center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 45&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO (Single Item Production):  Logs production one item at a time using a Production Work Order (PWO).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 46&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO (Multiple Item Production):  Logs production for multiple items with one single input material using a PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 47&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO Status Check:  Shows current status and history of a Production Work Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 48&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Quick Assembly:  Simplifies the process of recording completion of a basic assembly items without using a PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 49&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Scrap Item:  Logs a specific item as scrap and removes it from inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 50&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Laser Printer:  Sets the default laser printer for future prints from the scanner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 52&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Hold Control:  Places or releases a system:controlled hold on a scanned item or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 53&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Label:  Reprints the last scanned or selected label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 54&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy PWO Tag:  Creates a copy of a production tag for tracking or labeling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 55&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print Coil Tag:  Prints a new identification tag for a steel coil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 56&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print Pack List:  Prints a packing list for a carton, container, or shipping event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 57&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy Inventory Label:  Reprints or duplicates an inventory label for an item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 58&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Barcode_Scanner_-_Prompt_58_-_Cycle_Count Cycle Count]:  Starts a cycle count process to verify quantities for selected items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 70&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Create Carton:  Opens a new carton record to start building a packed shipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 71&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Carton Label:  Reprints a label for a previously created carton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 72&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Item Swap:  Swaps one item for another in a carton or bin (often due to substitution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 73&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PO Receipt:  Receives items against a purchase order into inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 74&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SO Load:  Loads items for a sales order into a carton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 75&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Welding Inspection:  Records inspection results for welding operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 76&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Bundle Label:  Reprints labels for bundled products or groups of items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 77&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Soft PO Receipt:  Receives a PO without physically scanning each item—often used for bulk or indirect receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 78&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SE Unpack (unload carton):  Unloads and verifies contents of a shipping event upon arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 79&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Load Shipping Event:  Loads cartons/items into a shipping event record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 84&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_84_-_Recommend_Coil Recommend Coil]:  Recommends up to 10 coils to use for the scanned Production Work Order (PWO) line, starting with the oldest coil up to the newest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 86&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_86_Station_List_-_86_STATION_Rule Assign Station]:  Assigns a scanned item or order to a specific workstation or production line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 87&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Production Time Prompt:  Scan a production line to begin a start/start time for production on that line. The second scan will stop the clock and provide a record displaying the amount of time taken to produce the line. Start/Stop scans are auditable from the Work Order using the ShiftF11 Audit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 88&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Cut Production:  Records cutting operation in production workflows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 99&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Log out:  Ends the current scanner session for the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prompts No Longer In Use==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CheckIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Pulling Cart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 7&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 8&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 12&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 13&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 14&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 15&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 17&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 19&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Load]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 21&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Add Box to MR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 22&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Where is (item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 25&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy CheckIn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 26&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 27&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Unpack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 28&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Picklist Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 33&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Picks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 39&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SP Load (for SE)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 51&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Restock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 59&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed SE Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 81&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 82&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Wireless Warehouse]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5885</id>
		<title>Prompt List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5885"/>
		<updated>2025-07-22T19:03:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Prompts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_04_-_Put_Away Put Away / Move]:  Used to relocate items within the warehouse from one location/bin to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Grouping:  Groups scanned items under a single container or identifier for streamlined handling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 9&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Package Status:  Displays the status and contents of a scanned package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 10&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Move Carton / Container:  Moves an entire carton or container to a new warehouse / bin location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 11&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Update Carton / Container:  Allows users to modify attributes or contents of a scanned container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 16&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Contents (of carton/box):  Shows the detailed contents inside a selected carton or box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 18&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Printer:  Lets the user switch to a different printer for label or document printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 20&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy Label:  Generates a duplicate of an existing item or carton label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 23&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Inspection Control:  Marks or verifies whether an item or container has passed inspection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 24&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Carton:  Deletes or invalidates a carton and removes it from the inventory system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 29&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing Status:  Checks or updates the packing progress or status for a sales or shipping event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 30&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; What is Here:  Scans a location to view all items currently present there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 31&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Physical Inventory:  Used to count and reconcile actual on:hand inventory at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 32&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Carton Inventory:  Lists and audits cartons currently in a specific warehouse location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 34&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change CID:  Changes the CID (Company ID) associated with the user&amp;#039;s scanner session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 35&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Warehouse:  Changes the user&amp;#039;s default warehouse context for the scanner session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 36&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Scan Document:  Attaches or indexes a scanned document, or initiate document scanning workflows tied to production or shipping tasks. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 37&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Carton Count:  Performs a carton:level count for reconciliation during cycle or physical inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 38&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed Cycle Count:  Initiates a cycle count for a specific item/location directed by system needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 40&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Repack / Remove SP:  Used to remove special packaging (SP) or repack items into new containers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 41&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_41-_Bin_Inventory_Transfer Bin Item Transfer]:  Transfers a specific item between bins in the same warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 42&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check Coil Allocation:   Scan a coil to check if it has been allocated on a sales order or a quote. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 43&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  AMS Scrap:  Records scrap for items in the AMS process or work center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 45&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO (Single Item Production):  Logs production one item at a time using a Production Work Order (PWO).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 46&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO (Multiple Item Production):  Logs production for multiple items with one single input material using a PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 47&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO Status Check:  Shows current status and history of a Production Work Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 48&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Quick Assembly:  Simplifies the process of recording completion of a basic assembly items without using a PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 49&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Scrap Item:  Logs a specific item as scrap and removes it from inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 50&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Laser Printer:  Sets the default laser printer for future prints from the scanner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 52&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Hold Control:  Places or releases a system:controlled hold on a scanned item or location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 53&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Label:  Reprints the last scanned or selected label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 54&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy PWO Tag:  Creates a copy of a production tag for tracking or labeling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 55&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print Coil Tag:  Prints a new identification tag for a steel coil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 56&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print Pack List:  Prints a packing list for a carton, container, or shipping event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 57&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy Inventory Label:  Reprints or duplicates an inventory label for an item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 58&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Barcode_Scanner_-_Prompt_58_-_Cycle_Count Cycle Count]:  Starts a cycle count process to verify quantities for selected items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 70&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Create Carton:  Opens a new carton record to start building a packed shipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 71&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Carton Label:  Reprints a label for a previously created carton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 72&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Item Swap:  Swaps one item for another in a carton or bin (often due to substitution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 73&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PO Receipt:  Receives items against a purchase order into inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 74&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SO Load:  Loads items for a sales order into a carton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 75&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Welding Inspection:  Records inspection results for welding operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 76&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Bundle Label:  Reprints labels for bundled products or groups of items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 77&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Soft PO Receipt:  Receives a PO without physically scanning each item—often used for bulk or indirect receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 78&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SE Unpack (unload carton):  Unloads and verifies contents of a shipping event upon arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 79&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Load Shipping Event:  Loads cartons/items into a shipping event record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 84&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_84_-_Recommend_Coil Recommend Coil]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 86&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_86_Station_List_-_86_STATION_Rule Assign Station]:  Assigns a scanned item or order to a specific workstation or production line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 87&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Production Time Prompt:  Scan a production line to begin a start/start time for production on that line. The second scan will stop the clock and provide a record displaying the amount of time taken to produce the line. Start/Stop scans are auditable from the Work Order using the ShiftF11 Audit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 88&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Cut Production:  Records cutting operation in production workflows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 99&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Log out:  Ends the current scanner session for the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prompts No Longer In Use==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CheckIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Pulling Cart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 7&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 8&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 12&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 13&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 14&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 15&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 17&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 19&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Load]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 21&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Add Box to MR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 22&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Where is (item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 25&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy CheckIn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 26&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 27&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Unpack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 28&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Picklist Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 33&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Picks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 39&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SP Load (for SE)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 51&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Restock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 59&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed SE Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 81&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 82&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Wireless Warehouse]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5884</id>
		<title>Prompt List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5884"/>
		<updated>2025-07-21T16:50:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Prompts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_04_-_Put_Away Put Away / Move]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Grouping&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 9&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Package Status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 10&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Move Carton / Container&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 11&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Update Carton / Container&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 16&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Contents (of carton/box)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 18&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Printer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 20&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy Label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 23&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Inspection Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 24&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Carton&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 29&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing Status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 30&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; What is Here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 31&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Physical Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 32&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Carton Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 34&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change CID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 35&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 36&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Scan Document&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 37&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Carton Count&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 38&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed Cycle Count&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 40&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Repack / Remove SP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 41&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_41-_Bin_Inventory_Transfer Bin Item Transfer]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 42&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check Coil Allocation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 43&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; AMS Scrap&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 45&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO (Single Item Production)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 46&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO (Multiple Item Production)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 47&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PWO Status Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 48&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Quick Assembly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 49&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Scrap Item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 50&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Change Laser Printer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 52&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Hold Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 53&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 54&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy PWO Tag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 55&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print Coil Tag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 56&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print Pack List&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 57&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy Inventory Label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 58&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Barcode_Scanner_-_Prompt_58_-_Cycle_Count Cycle Count]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 70&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Create Carton&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 71&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Carton Label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 72&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Item Swap&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 73&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PO Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 74&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SO Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 75&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Welding Inspection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 76&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reprint Bundle Label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 77&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Soft PO Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 78&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SE Unpack (unload carton)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 79&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Load Shipping Event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 84&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_84_-_Recommend_Coil Recommend Coil]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 86&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_86_Station_List_-_86_STATION_Rule Assign Station]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 87&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Production Time Prompt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 88&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Cut Production&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 99&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Log out&lt;br /&gt;
==Prompts No Longer In Use==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CheckIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Pulling Cart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 7&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 8&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 12&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 13&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 14&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 15&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 17&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 19&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Load]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 21&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Add Box to MR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 22&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Where is (item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 25&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy CheckIn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 26&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 27&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Unpack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 28&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Picklist Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 33&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Picks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 39&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SP Load (for SE)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 51&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Restock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 59&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed SE Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 81&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 82&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Wireless Warehouse]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5883</id>
		<title>Prompt List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5883"/>
		<updated>2025-07-21T16:43:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Prompts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_04_-_Put_Away Put Away / Move]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Grouping]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 9&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Package Status]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 10&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Move Carton / Container]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 11&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Update Carton / Container]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 16&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Contents (of carton/box)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 18&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change Printer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 20&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Copy Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 23&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Inspection Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 24&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Destroy Carton]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 29&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Packing Status]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 30&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[What is Here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 31&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Physical Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 32&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Carton Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 34&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change CID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 35&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change Warehouse]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 36&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Scan Document]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 37&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Carton Count]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 38&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Directed Cycle Count]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 40&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Repack / Remove SP]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 41&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_41-_Bin_Inventory_Transfer Bin Item Transfer]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 42&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Check Coil Allocation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 43&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[AMS Scrap]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 45&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO (Single Item Production)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 46&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO (Multiple Item Production)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 47&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO Status Check]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 48&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Quick Assembly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 49&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Scrap Item]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 50&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change Laser Printer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 52&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Hold Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 53&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Reprint Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 54&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Copy PWO Tag]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 55&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Print Coil Tag]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 56&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Print Pack List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 57&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Copy Inventory Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 58&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Barcode_Scanner_-_Prompt_58_-_Cycle_Count Cycle Count]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 70&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Create Carton]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 71&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Reprint Carton Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 72&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Item Swap]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 73&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PO Receipt]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 74&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[SO Load]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 75&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Welding Inspection]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 76&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Reprint Bundle Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 77&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Soft PO Receipt]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 78&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[SE Unpack (unload carton)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 79&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Load Shipping Event]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 84&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_84_-_Recommend_Coil Recommend Coil]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 86&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_86_Station_List_-_86_STATION_Rule Assign Station]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 87&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Production Time Prompt]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 88&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Cut Production]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 99&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Log out]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Prompts No Longer In Use==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CheckIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Pulling Cart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 7&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 8&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 12&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 13&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 14&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 15&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 17&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 19&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Load]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 21&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Add Box to MR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 22&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Where is (item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 25&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy CheckIn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 26&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 27&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Unpack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 28&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Picklist Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 33&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Picks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 39&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SP Load (for SE)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 51&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Restock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 59&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed SE Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 81&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 82&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Wireless Warehouse]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5882</id>
		<title>Prompt List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5882"/>
		<updated>2025-07-21T16:40:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Prompts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Put Away / Move]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Grouping]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 9&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Package Status]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 10&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Move Carton / Container]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 11&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Update Carton / Container]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 16&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Contents (of carton/box)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 18&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change Printer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 20&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Copy Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 23&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Inspection Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 24&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Destroy Carton]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 29&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Packing Status]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 30&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[What is Here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 31&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Physical Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 32&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Carton Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 34&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change CID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 35&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change Warehouse]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 36&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Scan Document]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 37&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Carton Count]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 38&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Directed Cycle Count]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 40&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Repack / Remove SP]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 41&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Bin Item Transfer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 42&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Check Coil Allocation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 43&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[AMS Scrap]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 45&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO (Single Item Production)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 46&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO (Multiple Item Production)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 47&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO Status Check]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 48&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Quick Assembly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 49&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Scrap Item]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 50&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change Laser Printer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 52&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Hold Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 53&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Reprint Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 54&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Copy PWO Tag]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 55&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Print Coil Tag]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 56&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Print Pack List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 57&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Copy Inventory Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 58&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Barcode_Scanner_-_Prompt_58_-_Cycle_Count Cycle Count]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 70&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Create Carton]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 71&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Reprint Carton Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 72&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Item Swap]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 73&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PO Receipt]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 74&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[SO Load]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 75&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Welding Inspection]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 76&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Reprint Bundle Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 77&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Soft PO Receipt]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 78&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[SE Unpack (unload carton)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 79&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Load Shipping Event]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 84&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_84_-_Recommend_Coil Recommend Coil]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 86&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Assign Station]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 87&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Production Time Prompt]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 88&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Cut Production]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 99&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Log out]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Prompts No Longer In Use==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CheckIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Pulling Cart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 7&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 8&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 12&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 13&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 14&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 15&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 17&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 19&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Load]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 21&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Add Box to MR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 22&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Where is (item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 25&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy CheckIn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 26&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 27&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Unpack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 28&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Picklist Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 33&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Picks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 39&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SP Load (for SE)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 51&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Restock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 59&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed SE Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 81&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 82&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Packing&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5881</id>
		<title>Prompt List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Prompt_List&amp;diff=5881"/>
		<updated>2025-07-21T16:35:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Created page with &amp;quot;==Prompts==  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Put Away / Move  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Grouping  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 9&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Package Status  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 10&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Move Carton / Container  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 11&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Prompts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Put Away / Move]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Grouping]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 9&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Package Status]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 10&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Move Carton / Container]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 11&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Update Carton / Container]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 16&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Contents (of carton/box)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 18&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change Printer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 20&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Copy Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 23&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Inspection Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 24&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Destroy Carton]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 29&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Packing Status]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 30&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[What is Here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 31&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Physical Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 32&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Carton Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 34&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change CID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 35&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Change Warehouse]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 36&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Scan Document]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 37&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Carton Count]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 38&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Directed Cycle Count]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 40&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Repack / Remove SP]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 41&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Bin Item Transfer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 42&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Check Coil Allocation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 43&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[AMS Scrap]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 45&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO (Single Item Production)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 46&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO (Multiple Item Production)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 47&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[PWO Status Check]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 48&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [[Quick Assembly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prompts No Longer In Use==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CheckIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Pulling Cart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 7&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Packing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 8&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 12&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 13&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Pulling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 14&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 15&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Destroy Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 17&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 19&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Load]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 21&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Add Box to MR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 22&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Where is (item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 25&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Copy CheckIn&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 26&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Repack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 27&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; MR Unpack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 28&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Picklist Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 33&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Unload Picks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 39&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; SP Load (for SE)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 51&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Restock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 59&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Directed SE Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 81&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prompt 82&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Close Packing&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Configurator_Setup&amp;diff=5879</id>
		<title>Item Configurator Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Configurator_Setup&amp;diff=5879"/>
		<updated>2025-06-19T22:01:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Sales Order Configurator Setup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ItemConfig_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Item Configuration, or Sales Order Configurator Setup, screen is used to manage options for item configurations. This screen can be accessed through the menu, or via the Configurable Item attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Item_Config_Jump_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Master Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
Create, view, edit and delete item configuration questions. Configurations can be copied from existing items using the Copy button in the actions menu. &lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quest#:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The question number. Determines the order in which the question appear in the configuration modal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Question:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The question to be displayed for the item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print Question&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select this box to print the SOC question and answer on the sales order forms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The type of question (List, Text, Number, Calculation)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rep Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The report code. This code is used to exclude and direct questions/answers on a printed form and for calculated values (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter an item from the Item Master if the Number type is selected and you need an additional item for contract or special pricing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unit:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the unit of the item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price/Cost Adjust&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box if the answer should adjust the item price or cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price Adjust:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount the item price should be adjusted.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost Adjust:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount the item cost should be adjusted.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;or From Q#:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a question number to allow the value from this question to overwrite price or cost adjustments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the question is a LIST type, enter the possible answers in the box on the left, and enter the price adjustment for each item.  The field next to the Price Adjust is for an Other Adjustment (See below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Controlling Qty:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the answer is the controlling quantity of the configurable item  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For example, length may be the controlling quantity if an item is sold per piece, but priced by the foot, the Controlling Qty and the Pricing Qty MUST match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Display Price Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box if you want the price adjustment to be displayed next to the answer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Other Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Other adjustment; enter a value to be used in calculating another adjustment other than price (weight, volume, area, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if question #1 (gauge/color), question #2 (girth), and question #6 (length) determine the total weight of the item (question #7), then we can direct the values chosen in #1, 2, 6 to #7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pass 1:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter a question # here if you want to multiply this question&amp;#039;s price adjustment by the quantity from another question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pass 2:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter a question # here if you want to multiply this question&amp;#039;s price adjustment by the quantity of another question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Visible on Calculation questions only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dec Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The number of decimal places allowed in the answer (for Number type questions)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box if the number is to be displayed in inches&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ft-Inch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the number is to be displayed in feet and inches&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Min&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The minimum number allowed for the answer when the Number type is selected&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Max&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The maximum number allowed for the answer when the Number type is selected&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Increment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the corresponding decimal for the fractional increment desired. Used with the Ft-Inch and Inch number formats. For example, to allow an answer in 16ths of an inch, your increment would be 0.0625.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Visible on Calculation questions only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Calculation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the question/answer is to be a calculated value. &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Formula&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the formula to be used to calculate the value. The formula should use the report codes of the appropriate questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preview Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview Tab allows a user to fine-tune the factors affecting a configurable item&amp;#039;s final price. As variables are adjusted on the screen, text will display showing the flow of rules used in determining the item&amp;#039;s price. The [[Customer Pricing]] screen can also be accessed from this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:itemconfigpreview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Item Control]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Configurator_Setup&amp;diff=5878</id>
		<title>Item Configurator Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Configurator_Setup&amp;diff=5878"/>
		<updated>2025-06-19T21:39:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Sales Order Configurator Setup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ItemConfig_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Item Configuration screen is used to manage options for item configurations. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Item_Config_Jump_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Master Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
Create, view, edit and delete item configuration questions. Configurations can be copied from existing items using the Copy button in the actions menu. &lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quest#:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The question number  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This determines the order in which the question appears&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Question:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The question to be displayed for the item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The type of question (List, Text, Number, Calculation)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rept:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The report code  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This code is used to exclude and direct questions/answers on a printed form and for calculated values (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calc:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the question/answer is to be a calculated value  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the formula to be used to calculate the value in the Formula field  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dec Qty:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The number of decimal places allowed in the answer (for Number type questions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inch:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box if the number is to be displayed in inches&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ft-Inch:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the number is to be displayed in feet and inches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Min:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The minimum number allowed for the answer when the Number type is selected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Max:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The maximum number allowed for the answer when the Number type is selected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Increment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The number increment allowed for the answer when the Number type is selected  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the answer is to be typed in feet or inches enter the corresponding decimal for the fractional increment desired.  For example, to allow an answer in 16ths of an inch, your increment would be 0.0625.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter an item from the Item Master if the Number type is selected and you need an additional item for contract or special pricing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unit:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the unit of the item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;   Check this box if the answer determines a price change in the configurable item  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If applicable, enter the amount of price adjustment in the field below the checkbox  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the PRICE adjustment is determined from another question, enter the question number in the or From Q# field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the question is a LIST type, enter the possible answers in the box on the left, and enter the price adjustment for each item.  The field next to the Price Adjust is for an Other Adjustment (See below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Controlling Qty:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the answer is the controlling quantity of the configurable item  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For example, length may be the controlling quantity if an item is sold per piece, but priced by the foot, the Controlling Qty and the Pricing Qty MUST match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Display Price Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box if you want the price adjustment to be displayed next to the answer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Other Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Other adjustment; enter a value to be used in calculating another adjustment other than price (weight, volume, area, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if question #1 (gauge/color), question #2 (girth), and question #6 (length) determine the total weight of the item (question #7), then we can direct the values chosen in #1, 2, 6 to #7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pass 1:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter a question # here if you want to multiply this question&amp;#039;s price adjustment by the quantity from another question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pass 2:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter a question # here if you want to multiply this question&amp;#039;s price adjustment by the quantity of another question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preview Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview Tab allows a user to fine-tune the factors affecting a configurable item&amp;#039;s final price. As variables are adjusted on the screen, text will display showing the flow of rules used in determining the item&amp;#039;s price. The [[Customer Pricing]] screen can also be accessed from this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:itemconfigpreview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Item Control]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Configurator_Setup&amp;diff=5877</id>
		<title>Item Configurator Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Item_Configurator_Setup&amp;diff=5877"/>
		<updated>2025-06-19T21:35:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Sales Order Configurator Setup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ItemConfig_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Sales Order Configurator Setup screen is used to set up options/questions for configurable items. Item Configurations can be copied from existing items using the Copy button in the actions menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Item_Config_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Item_Config_Jump_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quest#:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The question number  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This determines the order in which the question appears&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Question:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The question to be displayed for the item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The type of question (List, Text, Number, Calculation)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rept:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The report code  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This code is used to exclude and direct questions/answers on a printed form and for calculated values (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calc:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the question/answer is to be a calculated value  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the formula to be used to calculate the value in the Formula field  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dec Qty:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The number of decimal places allowed in the answer (for Number type questions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inch:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box if the number is to be displayed in inches&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ft-Inch:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the number is to be displayed in feet and inches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Min:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The minimum number allowed for the answer when the Number type is selected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Max:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The maximum number allowed for the answer when the Number type is selected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Increment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The number increment allowed for the answer when the Number type is selected  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the answer is to be typed in feet or inches enter the corresponding decimal for the fractional increment desired.  For example, to allow an answer in 16ths of an inch, your increment would be 0.0625.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter an item from the Item Master if the Number type is selected and you need an additional item for contract or special pricing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unit:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the unit of the item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;   Check this box if the answer determines a price change in the configurable item  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If applicable, enter the amount of price adjustment in the field below the checkbox  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the PRICE adjustment is determined from another question, enter the question number in the or From Q# field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the question is a LIST type, enter the possible answers in the box on the left, and enter the price adjustment for each item.  The field next to the Price Adjust is for an Other Adjustment (See below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Controlling Qty:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box if the answer is the controlling quantity of the configurable item  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For example, length may be the controlling quantity if an item is sold per piece, but priced by the foot, the Controlling Qty and the Pricing Qty MUST match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Display Price Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box if you want the price adjustment to be displayed next to the answer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Other Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Other adjustment; enter a value to be used in calculating another adjustment other than price (weight, volume, area, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if question #1 (gauge/color), question #2 (girth), and question #6 (length) determine the total weight of the item (question #7), then we can direct the values chosen in #1, 2, 6 to #7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pass 1:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter a question # here if you want to multiply this question&amp;#039;s price adjustment by the quantity from another question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pass 2:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter a question # here if you want to multiply this question&amp;#039;s price adjustment by the quantity of another question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preview Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview Tab allows a user to fine-tune the factors affecting a configurable item&amp;#039;s final price. As variables are adjusted on the screen, text will display showing the flow of rules used in determining the item&amp;#039;s price. The [[Customer Pricing]] screen can also be accessed from this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:itemconfigpreview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Item Control]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Track_Length&amp;diff=5873</id>
		<title>Track Length</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Track_Length&amp;diff=5873"/>
		<updated>2025-04-08T05:13:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Available from the Item Master sidebar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; TrackLength_S.htm?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The &amp;#039;Track Length&amp;#039; selection on the Item Master screen is a way of tracking different subsets of inventory under one item code.  For example, you could have an item called FLATBAR12 for 1/2 inch thick flat bar and track all the different length and width combinations under that one item code.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Any item with &amp;#039;Track Length&amp;#039; selected should also be lot controlled.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Settings Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ID1:  Enter a label here to define the primary way to track inventory for the selected item.  &amp;#039;Length&amp;#039; for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ID2:  Define a second measurement (if needed).  For example, you can track &amp;#039;Length&amp;#039; under ID1 and use ID2 for &amp;#039;Width&amp;#039; to track different sizes of plate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; When you select the &amp;#039;Track Length&amp;#039; option on an item, the following fields on the Settings tab of the Item Master record aren&amp;#039;t used anymore:  Base Cost, Unit Weight, Sq. Ft. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-03-17_101425.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Track Length Screen==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Track Length screen is accessed by clicking &amp;quot;Track Length&amp;quot; on the Item Master screen for an item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields and Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost Calc:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This calculation can determine a specific base cost for each ID1/ID2 combination.  This base cost can be used for customer pricing.  For example, a customer tier of WALKIN can be set up to pay 75% over this base cost.  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Available fields for the calculation are defined in the Factors section below.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Cost Factor:  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This field allows you to enter a base cost as it pertains to a specific ID1/ID2 combination.  For example, if an item&amp;#039;s base cost is 2.00 per foot, then you could enter &amp;#039;2.00&amp;#039; as the Cost Factor and &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;#039;[id1]*[cf]&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; as the &amp;#039;Cost Calc&amp;#039; to have it multiply that cost by the length (which is represented by the ID1 field).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Wt Calc:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This calculation can determine a specific weight for each ID1/ID2 combination.  For example, if something was 3.5 lbs/ft, then you would enter 3.5 as the Wt Factor and &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;#039;[id2]*[wf]&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; as the Wt Calc.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Wt Factor:  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Much like the Cost Factor, this field holds the weight as it pertains to a specific ID1/ID2 combination (weight per foot, weight per square, etc.).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;The grid at the bottom of the screen can be used to override Base Cost, Min Qty/Max Qty (for ordering), Unit Weight, Unit Length, Unit SqFt for each ID1/ID2 combination.  If any of the calculated fields are set to zero (0), they will be recalcuated based on the factors and calculations at the top of the screen. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Factors===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost Factor: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This can be used to set up a certain cost as it pertains to the ID1/ID2 combination.  The expression is &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[cf]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; if you want to use it in a calculation. For example, if ID1 represents length, the amount entered here can reference a certain base cost per foot or inch.  This calculation would be entered as &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;#039;[id1]*[cf]&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; to calculate the base cost per foot, assuming ID1= Length and &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[cf]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; = base cost per foot.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[id1]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; - References the ID1 field;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[id2]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; - References the ID2 field;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[cf]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; - References the Cost Factor field;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[wf]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; - References the Weight Factor field;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[lf]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; - References the Length Factor field;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[sf]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; - References the SqFt Factor field;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-03-17_102233.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sales Orders==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add an item to a sales order that has the &amp;#039;Track Length&amp;#039; option selected, two fields will display so you can enter a length/width (or whatever the ID1/ID2 combination happens to be).  This will enter that specific combination to the Lengths screen automatically if it doesn&amp;#039;t already exists, and calculate the weight, cost, etc. according to the defined calculations.  You can also change the Pricing Unit to display the sell price per LB, CWT, FT, IN, EA and SQFT (if item has an ID2 field for width).  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ID1 and ID2 entries should be in decimal format.  Also, the sell unit is always &amp;#039;EA&amp;#039;.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-03-17_132914.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Purchase Orders==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to sales orders two fields will display on a purchase order for these &amp;#039;Track Length&amp;#039; items so you can enter a length/width (or whatever the ID1/ID2 combination happens to be).  This will enter that specific combination to the Lengths screen automatically if it doesn&amp;#039;t already exists, and calculate the weight, cost, etc. according to the defined calculations.  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ID1 and ID2 entries should be in decimal format.  Also, the purchase unit is always &amp;#039;EA&amp;#039;.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-03-17_133839.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Transfers &amp;amp; Adjustments==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ID1 and ID2 fields were added to the inventory adjustment screen.  This allows adjusting in new combinations of lengths and widths without using a purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-03-17_142124.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modification Processor==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ID1 and ID2 fields were also added to Modification Processor.  This allows making different length/width combinations by modifying existing inventory.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Make sure the Allocate By is &amp;#039;Catch Unit&amp;#039;.  This distributes the cost using the unit weight of the new pieces. (The unit weight is dictated by the weight calculation on the Lengths screen).  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Crop button to divide the ID1 field in half, or the Slit function split the ID2 field.  Once you either crop or slit the desired number of pieces, you can adjust the ID1/ID2 fields to the desired dimensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Database tables==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ITEMID: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This table contains the fields in the grid of the Lengths tab.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ITEMIDH: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This table links the calculations available in the ITEMIDCALC rule to the specific item code.  It also contains the base cost and weight factors from the Lengths screen.     &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rules==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ITEMIDCALC: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This rule contains the calculations available in the Lengths screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-03-17_103426.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Desc: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This is what displays in the dropdown when choosing the calculation.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Type: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; These types control where the rule displays on the Lengths screen.  Valid types are:  COST - displays in the &amp;#039;Cost Calc&amp;#039; drop down; WT - displays in the &amp;#039;Wt Calc&amp;#039; drop down; LEN - displays in the &amp;#039;Length Calc&amp;#039; drop down; SQFT - displays in the &amp;#039;SqFt Calc&amp;#039; drop down.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calculation: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This fields contains calculations using variables from the Factors section to calculate the cost, weight, length and square footage of each individual ID1/ID2 combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; UNITS: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Since the calculations on the Lengths screen drives weights and cost conversions, you will want to set up a separate unit group for items with &amp;#039;Track Length&amp;#039; selected in Item Master.  This new unit group should contain the following units, each with a one-to-one conversion ratio:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*CWT&lt;br /&gt;
*EA&lt;br /&gt;
*FT&lt;br /&gt;
*IN&lt;br /&gt;
*LBS&lt;br /&gt;
*SQFT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-03-17_104247.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Question: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Is there a way to update the values on the Lengths screen other than accessing each individual Item Master record?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Answer:  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Yes.  There is an import that allows you to edit these values.  More information on that import can be found in the following link: [[Track Length Cost Update|CLICK HERE]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Item Control]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Glclose&amp;diff=5741</id>
		<title>Glclose</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Glclose&amp;diff=5741"/>
		<updated>2024-12-31T22:23:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page Glclose to Close GL Period and Year&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Close GL Period and Year]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Close_GL_Period_and_Year&amp;diff=5740</id>
		<title>Close GL Period and Year</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Close_GL_Period_and_Year&amp;diff=5740"/>
		<updated>2024-12-31T22:23:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page Glclose to Close GL Period and Year&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Close GL Period/Year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  GLClose_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Close GL Period and Year screen is used to close a period, year or to re-close prior year.  The Current GL Period and Current GL Year are stored in the CID record and are automatically loaded onto the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Close_GL_Period_and_Year.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closing a Period changes the current fiscal period. You can still post entries into a closed period that is not locked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locking a Period prevents any batches from being posted into that period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closing a Year will move the fiscal year&amp;#039;s profit/loss into the Retained Earnings account that&amp;#039;s listed on the [[Company ID Maintenance]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Can you post batches into a period that&amp;#039;s been closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  Yes, you can post batches into a closed period as long as the period has not been locked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Once a period is locked, can it be unlocked?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  Yes, go to the [[Company ID Maintenance]] screen and click the Fiscal Calendar tab.  Click EDIT and then uncheck the Locked box for the corresponding period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  What kind of journal entry does &amp;#039;Close Year&amp;#039; make? Does it have to be posted?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  It moves the year&amp;#039;s profit/loss into Retained Earnings. The entry is automatically created and posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Oh no, I closed the year, and I forgot to make one last journal entry! What do I do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  First, calm down. Second, unlock whichever period you need to make an entry in and enter/post the journal entry. Then come back to this screen and click the Re-Close Prior Year button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:General Ledger]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Close_GL_Period_and_Year&amp;diff=5739</id>
		<title>Close GL Period and Year</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Close_GL_Period_and_Year&amp;diff=5739"/>
		<updated>2024-12-31T22:22:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Close GL Period/Year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  GLClose_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Close GL Period and Year screen is used to close a period, year or to re-close prior year.  The Current GL Period and Current GL Year are stored in the CID record and are automatically loaded onto the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Close_GL_Period_and_Year.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closing a Period changes the current fiscal period. You can still post entries into a closed period that is not locked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locking a Period prevents any batches from being posted into that period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closing a Year will move the fiscal year&amp;#039;s profit/loss into the Retained Earnings account that&amp;#039;s listed on the [[Company ID Maintenance]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Can you post batches into a period that&amp;#039;s been closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  Yes, you can post batches into a closed period as long as the period has not been locked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Once a period is locked, can it be unlocked?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  Yes, go to the [[Company ID Maintenance]] screen and click the Fiscal Calendar tab.  Click EDIT and then uncheck the Locked box for the corresponding period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  What kind of journal entry does &amp;#039;Close Year&amp;#039; make? Does it have to be posted?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  It moves the year&amp;#039;s profit/loss into Retained Earnings. The entry is automatically created and posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Oh no, I closed the year, and I forgot to make one last journal entry! What do I do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  First, calm down. Second, unlock whichever period you need to make an entry in and enter/post the journal entry. Then come back to this screen and click the Re-Close Prior Year button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:General Ledger]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Close_GL_Period_and_Year&amp;diff=5738</id>
		<title>Close GL Period and Year</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Close_GL_Period_and_Year&amp;diff=5738"/>
		<updated>2024-12-31T22:21:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Created page with &amp;quot;__NOTOC__  ===General Information===  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Close GL Period/Year  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  GLClose_S.htm  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Close G...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Close GL Period/Year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  GLClose_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Close GL Period and Year screen is used to close a period, year or to re-close prior year.  The Current GL Period and Current GL Year are stored in the CID record and are automatically loaded onto the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closing a Period changes the current fiscal period. You can still post entries into a closed period that is not locked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locking a Period prevents any batches from being posted into that period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closing a Year will move the fiscal year&amp;#039;s profit/loss into the Retained Earnings account that&amp;#039;s listed on the [[Company ID Maintenance]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Close_GL_Period_and_Year.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===FAQ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Can you post batches into a period that&amp;#039;s been closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  Yes, you can post batches into a closed period as long as the period has not been locked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Once a period is locked, can it be unlocked?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  Yes, go to the [[Company ID Maintenance]] screen and click the Fiscal Calendar tab.  Click EDIT and then uncheck the Locked box for the corresponding period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  What kind of journal entry does &amp;#039;Close Year&amp;#039; make? Does it have to be posted?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  It moves the year&amp;#039;s profit/loss into Retained Earnings. The entry is automatically created and posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q:  Oh no, I closed the year, and I forgot to make one last journal entry! What do I do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A:  First, calm down. Second, unlock whichever period you need to make an entry in and enter/post the journal entry. Then come back to this screen and click the Re-Close Prior Year button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:General Ledger]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Inventory_vs_GL_Dump_Accounts_-_INVDUMP_Rule&amp;diff=5736</id>
		<title>Inventory vs GL Dump Accounts - INVDUMP Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Inventory_vs_GL_Dump_Accounts_-_INVDUMP_Rule&amp;diff=5736"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T19:19:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts rule controls which general ledger accounts are included in the overnight inventory reporting and reconciliation features, commonly referred to as the Nite Inventory process. Each GL account set up in this rule will be processed nightly, and will have account balances and transaction details stored in the data tables used for the Nite Inventory and Nite Usage reports. This rule controls which accounts have transaction vs. GL comparison data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nite Inventory process is designed to record historical data overnight each and every night to improve historical research and reconciliation activities when inventory, accounts receivable, or accounts payable GL balances get out of balance with the transaction data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[GL Accts for Inventory - INVGLACCTS Rule | GL Accts for Inventory - INVGLACCTS Rule]] must also be set up with the same GL accounts as this rule in order for the Nite Inventory processes to work properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [^PRINTNITEINV|Nite Inventory process] is a system service that must be set up by ABIS personnel in order to start tracking nightly inventory and GL reconciliation data. Contact your ABIS consultant if you want the Nite Inventory process set up and running. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: INVDUMP_Rule_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Text Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Account (text1):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the general ledger (GL) accounts that should be processed as part of the Nite Inventory reporting. For each GL account entered, the Warehouse (Whse) name and the Type must be specified. The Acct? (log1) checkbox must also be checked to flag the rule entry as a GL account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Inventory tracking, a single stock inventory account should be entered for each warehouse. The overnight reporting assumes a single stock inventory GL per warehouse. Non-stock, consignment, or other custom inventory GL accounts should not be added to this rule. It is designed for tracking stock inventory movement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For AR and AP tracking, enter each appropriate account and specify the Type value of AR or AP to track and report GL balance comparison data nightly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Whse Name (text2):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The warehouse name should be entered for each GL account entered. For customers operating in a single warehouse environment, this can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email Address (text3):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter email addresses that should receive the Nite Inventory reports as soon as they are processed. Each email address entered must have the Email? (log2) checkbox checked to flag the entry as an email setting rather than a GL account. Multiple email addresses can be entered as separate entries with the Email? box checked for each entry. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type (AR, AP, INV) (text4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Each GL account entry must have the Type specified as either INV (Inventory), AR (Accounts Receivable), or AP (Accounts Payable). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Number Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Number Fields In Use&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Logic Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Acct? (log1):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This designates a rule entry as a GL account entry. Check this box for each GL added to the rule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email? (log2):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This designates a rule entry as an email address entry. Check this box for each email address added to the rule.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Batch after mid (log3):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This should be checked for each account in environments where the nightly autobatch and posting happen after midnight. The default Nite Inventory logic processes before midnight and assumes the same day&amp;#039;s transactions and GL postings have happened before midnight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inv before mid (log4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This field works with the &amp;#039;Batch after mid&amp;#039; field and should only be checked if advised by ABIS personnel. Unchecked is the most common setting for this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Payable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: General Ledger]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Inventory Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Accts_for_Inventory_-_INVGLACCTS_Rule&amp;diff=5734</id>
		<title>GL Accts for Inventory - INVGLACCTS Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Accts_for_Inventory_-_INVGLACCTS_Rule&amp;diff=5734"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T19:17:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page Inventory GL Accounts - INVGLACCTS Rule to GL Accts for Inventory - INVGLACCTS Rule&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The GL Accounts for Inventory rule controls is a companion rule with the [[Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts Rule | Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts (INVDUMP)]] rule. Both rules together control which general ledger accounts are included in the overnight inventory reporting and reconciliation features, commonly referred to as the Nite Inventory process. This rule controls which GL accounts have their data sent to the nightly historical tables.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each GL account set up in this rule will be processed nightly, and will have account balances and transaction details stored in the data tables used for the Nite Inventory and Nite Usage reports. The Nite Inventory process is designed to record historical data overnight each and every night to improve historical research and reconciliation activities when inventory, accounts receivable, or accounts payable GL balances get out of balance with the transaction data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts Rule | Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts (INVDUMP)]] rule must also be set up with the same GL accounts as this rule in order for the Nite Inventory processes to work properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/PRINTNITEINV.ashx Nite Inventory process] is a system service that must be set up by ABIS personnel in order to start tracking nightly inventory and GL reconciliation data. Contact your ABIS consultant if you want the Nite Inventory process set up and running. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: INVGLACCTS_Rule_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Text Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Account (text1):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the general ledger (GL) accounts that should be processed as part of the Nite Inventory reporting. The GL accounts entered in this rule should match the GL accounts entered in the INVDUMP rule. The INVDUMP rule contains additional settings for how the GL comparison data is processed. This rule controls only controls which GL accounts are processed in the Nite Inventory data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Number Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Number Fields In Use&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Logic Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Logic Fields In Use&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Payable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: General Ledger]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Item Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Accts_for_Inventory_-_INVGLACCTS_Rule&amp;diff=5732</id>
		<title>GL Accts for Inventory - INVGLACCTS Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Accts_for_Inventory_-_INVGLACCTS_Rule&amp;diff=5732"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T19:15:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page GL Accts for Inventory - INGLACCTS Rule to Inventory GL Accounts - INVGLACCTS Rule&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The GL Accounts for Inventory rule controls is a companion rule with the [[Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts Rule | Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts (INVDUMP)]] rule. Both rules together control which general ledger accounts are included in the overnight inventory reporting and reconciliation features, commonly referred to as the Nite Inventory process. This rule controls which GL accounts have their data sent to the nightly historical tables.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each GL account set up in this rule will be processed nightly, and will have account balances and transaction details stored in the data tables used for the Nite Inventory and Nite Usage reports. The Nite Inventory process is designed to record historical data overnight each and every night to improve historical research and reconciliation activities when inventory, accounts receivable, or accounts payable GL balances get out of balance with the transaction data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts Rule | Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts (INVDUMP)]] rule must also be set up with the same GL accounts as this rule in order for the Nite Inventory processes to work properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/PRINTNITEINV.ashx Nite Inventory process] is a system service that must be set up by ABIS personnel in order to start tracking nightly inventory and GL reconciliation data. Contact your ABIS consultant if you want the Nite Inventory process set up and running. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: INVGLACCTS_Rule_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Text Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Account (text1):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the general ledger (GL) accounts that should be processed as part of the Nite Inventory reporting. The GL accounts entered in this rule should match the GL accounts entered in the INVDUMP rule. The INVDUMP rule contains additional settings for how the GL comparison data is processed. This rule controls only controls which GL accounts are processed in the Nite Inventory data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Number Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Number Fields In Use&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Logic Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Logic Fields In Use&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Payable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: General Ledger]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Item Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Accts_for_Inventory_-_INGLACCTS_Rule&amp;diff=5733</id>
		<title>GL Accts for Inventory - INGLACCTS Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Accts_for_Inventory_-_INGLACCTS_Rule&amp;diff=5733"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T19:15:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page GL Accts for Inventory - INGLACCTS Rule to Inventory GL Accounts - INVGLACCTS Rule&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Inventory GL Accounts - INVGLACCTS Rule]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segment_Values&amp;diff=5731</id>
		<title>GL Segment Values</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segment_Values&amp;diff=5731"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T17:40:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; GL Segment Values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GLSegment_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The GL Segment Values are used in building reports in the [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Financial_Report_Writer Financial Report Writer].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:GL_Segement_Values.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/ Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select a Segment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is a drop down selection created using the GLSegments rule.  The segment is the position between the predefine mask.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Segment Value&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The value being defined in the segment of the GL Account Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A short description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Long Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A long description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segment_Values&amp;diff=5730</id>
		<title>GL Segment Values</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segment_Values&amp;diff=5730"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T17:38:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; GL Segment Values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GLSegment_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The GL Segment Values are used in building reports in the [https://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Financial_Report_Writer|Financial Report Writer].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:GL_Segement_Values.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/ Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select a Segment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is a drop down selection created using the GLSegments rule.  The segment is the position between the predefine mask.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Segment Value&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The value being defined in the segment of the GL Account Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A short description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Long Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A long description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Glsegment&amp;diff=5729</id>
		<title>Glsegment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Glsegment&amp;diff=5729"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T17:36:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page Glsegment to GL Segment Values&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[GL Segment Values]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segment_Values&amp;diff=5728</id>
		<title>GL Segment Values</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segment_Values&amp;diff=5728"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T17:36:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page Glsegment to GL Segment Values&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; GL Segment Values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GLSegment_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The GL Segment Values are used in building reports in the [http://www.abiscorp.com/AdjWiki/GLREPORT.ashx|Financial Report Writer].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:GL_Segement_Values.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/ Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select a Segment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is a drop down selection created using the GLSegments rule.  The segment is the position between the predefine mask.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Segment Value&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The value being defined in the segment of the GL Account Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A short description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Long Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A long description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segment_Values&amp;diff=5727</id>
		<title>GL Segment Values</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segment_Values&amp;diff=5727"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T17:24:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Created page with &amp;quot;==General Information==  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; GL Segment Values  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GLSegment_S.htm  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The GL Segment Values are used...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; GL Segment Values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GLSegment_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The GL Segment Values are used in building reports in the [http://www.abiscorp.com/AdjWiki/GLREPORT.ashx|Financial Report Writer].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:GL_Segement_Values.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/ Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select a Segment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is a drop down selection created using the GLSegments rule.  The segment is the position between the predefine mask.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Segment Value&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The value being defined in the segment of the GL Account Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A short description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Long Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A long description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:GL_Segement_Values.png&amp;diff=5726</id>
		<title>File:GL Segement Values.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:GL_Segement_Values.png&amp;diff=5726"/>
		<updated>2024-12-27T17:18:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5640</id>
		<title>Apply Cash Receipts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5640"/>
		<updated>2024-10-24T16:28:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: /* Credit Card Payments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Apply Cash Receipts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CASHREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CashRec_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Apply Cash Receipts screen is used to enter cash receipts and apply them against open AR invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Applying Payments==&lt;br /&gt;
To apply cash to an invoice, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Cash Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. Then enter the Custno (customer number) or Company (customer name). The system will automatically bring up all open invoices for that customer. Select the appropriate Cash Account and enter the Cash Amount from the customer. Then, check which invoices to apply the cash payment to, and the system will automatically allocate the amount of the payment across the invoice(s) selected. The allocated amount can be change by editing the Paid Amt column in the bottom grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apply_Cash_Receipt_to_Customer_Invoices.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter an open credit, enter the amount of the credit in Cash Amount and click Save. A modal window will display asking &amp;quot;Create Open Credit with Un-Applied Balance?&amp;quot; Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. A second modal window will display with fields for the AR Account, Description, and Invoice Status. Fill these out and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to issue the unapplied amounts as an Open Credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Select_Account_for_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the payment has been allocated across the selected invoices, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custno/Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select the customer that the payment is from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invno:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select a specific invoice to pay with the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment Account/Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for adjustments to the invoice (bad debt, bank fees, write-off, etc). Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Acct:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the appropriate Cash account from the drop down box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Currency:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will default based on the Cash Account selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Amount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount Account:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for customer discounts. Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the cash receipt; this may be the check number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the bank deposit (optional); this may be the check number, date or a sequential number of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date when the transaction will go into Adjutant. This is often referred to as a the accounting date, because this is when the transaction will show as posted to the general ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Postmark Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The PostMark Date is the &amp;#039;paid&amp;#039; date. This is the date which is primarily used for calculating discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Project ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Use this field to tie the cash receipt to an existing project in Adjutant, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Phase:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the phase of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the cash receipt type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notes:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Leave any applicable notes or comments for this cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total balance for all invoices, including open credits and deposits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total adjustments entered into the Adj Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total discounts entered into the DisC Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unapplied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount unapplied to invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Applied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount applied to invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount paid on a specific invoice. Will auto-fill when the record is selected, and can be manually overriden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disc Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of customer discount on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ajd Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of adjustment on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepayment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check either Open Credit or Deposit if the customer has paid in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select from Cash, Check, Credit Card, Other, or NSF (insufficient funds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include Paid Invoices:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check to display all paid invoices in the Invoice List grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Card Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment on the Apply Cash screen by selecting Credit Card as the Payment Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen, following all of the same steps listed above for accepting payments in general, and then clicking the Pay With CC button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Setup_CC.png]] [[file:Pay_with_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This button will launch the Process Money screen defaulted to the Credit Card Money Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen. Read more about the [[Process Money]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Process_money_cc1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the payment is complete on the Process Money screen, return to the Apply Cash screen and click the Save Cash Rec button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to complete the cash receipt in Adjutant and apply the credit card payment to an invoice or create an open credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Save_cash_rec.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Process_money_cc1.png&amp;diff=5639</id>
		<title>File:Process money cc1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Process_money_cc1.png&amp;diff=5639"/>
		<updated>2024-10-24T16:27:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5638</id>
		<title>Apply Cash Receipts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5638"/>
		<updated>2024-10-24T16:27:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: /* Credit Card Payments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Apply Cash Receipts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CASHREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CashRec_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Apply Cash Receipts screen is used to enter cash receipts and apply them against open AR invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Applying Payments==&lt;br /&gt;
To apply cash to an invoice, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Cash Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. Then enter the Custno (customer number) or Company (customer name). The system will automatically bring up all open invoices for that customer. Select the appropriate Cash Account and enter the Cash Amount from the customer. Then, check which invoices to apply the cash payment to, and the system will automatically allocate the amount of the payment across the invoice(s) selected. The allocated amount can be change by editing the Paid Amt column in the bottom grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apply_Cash_Receipt_to_Customer_Invoices.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter an open credit, enter the amount of the credit in Cash Amount and click Save. A modal window will display asking &amp;quot;Create Open Credit with Un-Applied Balance?&amp;quot; Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. A second modal window will display with fields for the AR Account, Description, and Invoice Status. Fill these out and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to issue the unapplied amounts as an Open Credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Select_Account_for_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the payment has been allocated across the selected invoices, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custno/Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select the customer that the payment is from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invno:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select a specific invoice to pay with the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment Account/Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for adjustments to the invoice (bad debt, bank fees, write-off, etc). Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Acct:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the appropriate Cash account from the drop down box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Currency:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will default based on the Cash Account selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Amount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount Account:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for customer discounts. Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the cash receipt; this may be the check number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the bank deposit (optional); this may be the check number, date or a sequential number of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date when the transaction will go into Adjutant. This is often referred to as a the accounting date, because this is when the transaction will show as posted to the general ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Postmark Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The PostMark Date is the &amp;#039;paid&amp;#039; date. This is the date which is primarily used for calculating discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Project ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Use this field to tie the cash receipt to an existing project in Adjutant, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Phase:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the phase of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the cash receipt type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notes:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Leave any applicable notes or comments for this cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total balance for all invoices, including open credits and deposits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total adjustments entered into the Adj Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total discounts entered into the DisC Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unapplied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount unapplied to invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Applied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount applied to invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount paid on a specific invoice. Will auto-fill when the record is selected, and can be manually overriden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disc Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of customer discount on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ajd Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of adjustment on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepayment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check either Open Credit or Deposit if the customer has paid in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select from Cash, Check, Credit Card, Other, or NSF (insufficient funds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include Paid Invoices:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check to display all paid invoices in the Invoice List grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Card Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment on the Apply Cash screen by selecting Credit Card as the Payment Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen, following all of the same steps listed above for accepting payments in general, and then clicking the Pay With CC button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Setup_CC.png]] [[file:Pay_with_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This button will launch the Process Money screen defaulted to the Credit Card Money Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen. Read more about the [[Process Money]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the payment is complete on the Process Money screen, return to the Apply Cash screen and click the Save Cash Rec button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to complete the cash receipt in Adjutant and apply the credit card payment to an invoice or create an open credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Save_cash_rec.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5637</id>
		<title>Apply Cash Receipts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5637"/>
		<updated>2024-10-24T16:23:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: /* Credit Card Payments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Apply Cash Receipts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CASHREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CashRec_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Apply Cash Receipts screen is used to enter cash receipts and apply them against open AR invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Applying Payments==&lt;br /&gt;
To apply cash to an invoice, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Cash Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. Then enter the Custno (customer number) or Company (customer name). The system will automatically bring up all open invoices for that customer. Select the appropriate Cash Account and enter the Cash Amount from the customer. Then, check which invoices to apply the cash payment to, and the system will automatically allocate the amount of the payment across the invoice(s) selected. The allocated amount can be change by editing the Paid Amt column in the bottom grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apply_Cash_Receipt_to_Customer_Invoices.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter an open credit, enter the amount of the credit in Cash Amount and click Save. A modal window will display asking &amp;quot;Create Open Credit with Un-Applied Balance?&amp;quot; Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. A second modal window will display with fields for the AR Account, Description, and Invoice Status. Fill these out and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to issue the unapplied amounts as an Open Credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Select_Account_for_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the payment has been allocated across the selected invoices, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custno/Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select the customer that the payment is from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invno:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select a specific invoice to pay with the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment Account/Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for adjustments to the invoice (bad debt, bank fees, write-off, etc). Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Acct:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the appropriate Cash account from the drop down box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Currency:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will default based on the Cash Account selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Amount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount Account:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for customer discounts. Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the cash receipt; this may be the check number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the bank deposit (optional); this may be the check number, date or a sequential number of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date when the transaction will go into Adjutant. This is often referred to as a the accounting date, because this is when the transaction will show as posted to the general ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Postmark Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The PostMark Date is the &amp;#039;paid&amp;#039; date. This is the date which is primarily used for calculating discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Project ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Use this field to tie the cash receipt to an existing project in Adjutant, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Phase:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the phase of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the cash receipt type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notes:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Leave any applicable notes or comments for this cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total balance for all invoices, including open credits and deposits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total adjustments entered into the Adj Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total discounts entered into the DisC Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unapplied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount unapplied to invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Applied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount applied to invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount paid on a specific invoice. Will auto-fill when the record is selected, and can be manually overriden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disc Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of customer discount on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ajd Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of adjustment on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepayment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check either Open Credit or Deposit if the customer has paid in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select from Cash, Check, Credit Card, Other, or NSF (insufficient funds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include Paid Invoices:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check to display all paid invoices in the Invoice List grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Card Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment on the Apply Cash screen by selecting Credit Card as the Payment Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen, following all of the same steps listed above for accepting payments in general, and then clicking the Pay With CC button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Setup_CC.png]] [[file:Pay_with_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This button will launch the Process Money screen defaulted to the Credit Card Money Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen. Read more about the [[Process Money]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Process_money_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the payment is complete on the Process Money screen, return to the Apply Cash screen and click the Save Cash Rec button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to complete the cash receipt in Adjutant and apply the credit card payment to an invoice or create an open credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Save_cash_rec.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5636</id>
		<title>Apply Cash Receipts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5636"/>
		<updated>2024-10-24T16:23:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: /* Credit Card Payments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Apply Cash Receipts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CASHREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CashRec_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Apply Cash Receipts screen is used to enter cash receipts and apply them against open AR invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Applying Payments==&lt;br /&gt;
To apply cash to an invoice, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Cash Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. Then enter the Custno (customer number) or Company (customer name). The system will automatically bring up all open invoices for that customer. Select the appropriate Cash Account and enter the Cash Amount from the customer. Then, check which invoices to apply the cash payment to, and the system will automatically allocate the amount of the payment across the invoice(s) selected. The allocated amount can be change by editing the Paid Amt column in the bottom grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apply_Cash_Receipt_to_Customer_Invoices.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter an open credit, enter the amount of the credit in Cash Amount and click Save. A modal window will display asking &amp;quot;Create Open Credit with Un-Applied Balance?&amp;quot; Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. A second modal window will display with fields for the AR Account, Description, and Invoice Status. Fill these out and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to issue the unapplied amounts as an Open Credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Select_Account_for_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the payment has been allocated across the selected invoices, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custno/Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select the customer that the payment is from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invno:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select a specific invoice to pay with the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment Account/Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for adjustments to the invoice (bad debt, bank fees, write-off, etc). Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Acct:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the appropriate Cash account from the drop down box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Currency:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will default based on the Cash Account selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Amount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount Account:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for customer discounts. Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the cash receipt; this may be the check number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the bank deposit (optional); this may be the check number, date or a sequential number of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date when the transaction will go into Adjutant. This is often referred to as a the accounting date, because this is when the transaction will show as posted to the general ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Postmark Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The PostMark Date is the &amp;#039;paid&amp;#039; date. This is the date which is primarily used for calculating discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Project ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Use this field to tie the cash receipt to an existing project in Adjutant, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Phase:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the phase of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the cash receipt type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notes:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Leave any applicable notes or comments for this cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total balance for all invoices, including open credits and deposits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total adjustments entered into the Adj Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total discounts entered into the DisC Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unapplied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount unapplied to invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Applied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount applied to invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount paid on a specific invoice. Will auto-fill when the record is selected, and can be manually overriden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disc Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of customer discount on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ajd Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of adjustment on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepayment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check either Open Credit or Deposit if the customer has paid in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select from Cash, Check, Credit Card, Other, or NSF (insufficient funds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include Paid Invoices:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check to display all paid invoices in the Invoice List grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Card Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment on the Apply Cash screen by selecting Credit Card as the Payment Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen, following all of the same steps listed above for accepting payments in general, and then clicking the Pay With CC button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Setup_CC.png]] [[file:Pay_with_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This button will launch the Process Money screen defaulted to the Credit Card Money Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen. Read more about the [[Process Money]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the payment is complete on the Process Money screen, return to the Apply Cash screen and click the Save Cash Rec button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to complete the cash receipt in Adjutant and apply the credit card payment to an invoice or create an open credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Save_cash_rec.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5635</id>
		<title>Apply Cash Receipts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5635"/>
		<updated>2024-10-24T16:22:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: /* Credit Card Payments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Apply Cash Receipts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CASHREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CashRec_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Apply Cash Receipts screen is used to enter cash receipts and apply them against open AR invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Applying Payments==&lt;br /&gt;
To apply cash to an invoice, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Cash Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. Then enter the Custno (customer number) or Company (customer name). The system will automatically bring up all open invoices for that customer. Select the appropriate Cash Account and enter the Cash Amount from the customer. Then, check which invoices to apply the cash payment to, and the system will automatically allocate the amount of the payment across the invoice(s) selected. The allocated amount can be change by editing the Paid Amt column in the bottom grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apply_Cash_Receipt_to_Customer_Invoices.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter an open credit, enter the amount of the credit in Cash Amount and click Save. A modal window will display asking &amp;quot;Create Open Credit with Un-Applied Balance?&amp;quot; Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. A second modal window will display with fields for the AR Account, Description, and Invoice Status. Fill these out and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to issue the unapplied amounts as an Open Credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Select_Account_for_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the payment has been allocated across the selected invoices, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custno/Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select the customer that the payment is from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invno:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select a specific invoice to pay with the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment Account/Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for adjustments to the invoice (bad debt, bank fees, write-off, etc). Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Acct:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the appropriate Cash account from the drop down box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Currency:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will default based on the Cash Account selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Amount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount Account:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for customer discounts. Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the cash receipt; this may be the check number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the bank deposit (optional); this may be the check number, date or a sequential number of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date when the transaction will go into Adjutant. This is often referred to as a the accounting date, because this is when the transaction will show as posted to the general ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Postmark Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The PostMark Date is the &amp;#039;paid&amp;#039; date. This is the date which is primarily used for calculating discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Project ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Use this field to tie the cash receipt to an existing project in Adjutant, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Phase:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the phase of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the cash receipt type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notes:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Leave any applicable notes or comments for this cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total balance for all invoices, including open credits and deposits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total adjustments entered into the Adj Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total discounts entered into the DisC Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unapplied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount unapplied to invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Applied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount applied to invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount paid on a specific invoice. Will auto-fill when the record is selected, and can be manually overriden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disc Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of customer discount on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ajd Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of adjustment on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepayment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check either Open Credit or Deposit if the customer has paid in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select from Cash, Check, Credit Card, Other, or NSF (insufficient funds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include Paid Invoices:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check to display all paid invoices in the Invoice List grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Card Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment on the Apply Cash screen by selecting Credit Card as the Payment Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen, following all of the same steps listed above for accepting payments in general, and then clicking the Pay With CC button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Setup_CC.png]] [[file:Pay_with_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This button will launch the Process Money screen defaulted to the Credit Card Money Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen. Read more about the [[Process Money]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Process_money_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the payment is complete on the Process Money screen, return to the Apply Cash screen and click the Save Cash Rec button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to complete the cash receipt in Adjutant and apply the credit card payment to an invoice or create an open credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Save_cash_rec.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Setup_CC.png&amp;diff=5633</id>
		<title>File:Setup CC.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Setup_CC.png&amp;diff=5633"/>
		<updated>2024-10-24T16:18:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5632</id>
		<title>Apply Cash Receipts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5632"/>
		<updated>2024-10-24T16:13:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: /* Applying Payments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Apply Cash Receipts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CASHREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CashRec_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Apply Cash Receipts screen is used to enter cash receipts and apply them against open AR invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Applying Payments==&lt;br /&gt;
To apply cash to an invoice, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Cash Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. Then enter the Custno (customer number) or Company (customer name). The system will automatically bring up all open invoices for that customer. Select the appropriate Cash Account and enter the Cash Amount from the customer. Then, check which invoices to apply the cash payment to, and the system will automatically allocate the amount of the payment across the invoice(s) selected. The allocated amount can be change by editing the Paid Amt column in the bottom grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apply_Cash_Receipt_to_Customer_Invoices.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter an open credit, enter the amount of the credit in Cash Amount and click Save. A modal window will display asking &amp;quot;Create Open Credit with Un-Applied Balance?&amp;quot; Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. A second modal window will display with fields for the AR Account, Description, and Invoice Status. Fill these out and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to issue the unapplied amounts as an Open Credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Select_Account_for_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the payment has been allocated across the selected invoices, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custno/Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select the customer that the payment is from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invno:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select a specific invoice to pay with the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment Account/Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for adjustments to the invoice (bad debt, bank fees, write-off, etc). Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Acct:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the appropriate Cash account from the drop down box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Currency:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will default based on the Cash Account selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Amount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount Account:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for customer discounts. Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the cash receipt; this may be the check number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the bank deposit (optional); this may be the check number, date or a sequential number of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date when the transaction will go into Adjutant. This is often referred to as a the accounting date, because this is when the transaction will show as posted to the general ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Postmark Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The PostMark Date is the &amp;#039;paid&amp;#039; date. This is the date which is primarily used for calculating discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Project ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Use this field to tie the cash receipt to an existing project in Adjutant, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Phase:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the phase of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the cash receipt type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notes:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Leave any applicable notes or comments for this cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total balance for all invoices, including open credits and deposits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total adjustments entered into the Adj Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total discounts entered into the DisC Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unapplied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount unapplied to invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Applied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount applied to invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount paid on a specific invoice. Will auto-fill when the record is selected, and can be manually overriden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disc Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of customer discount on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ajd Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of adjustment on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepayment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check either Open Credit or Deposit if the customer has paid in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select from Cash, Check, Credit Card, Other, or NSF (insufficient funds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include Paid Invoices:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check to display all paid invoices in the Invoice List grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Card Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment on the Apply Cash screen by following all of the same steps listed above for accepting payments in general, and then clicking the Pay With CC button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Pay_with_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This button will launch the Process Money screen defaulted to the Credit Card Money Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen. Read more about the [[Process Money]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Process_money_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the payment is complete on the Process Money screen, return to the Apply Cash screen and click the Save Cash Rec button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to complete the cash receipt in Adjutant and apply the credit card payment to an invoice or create an open credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Save_cash_rec.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5624</id>
		<title>Apply Cash Receipts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Apply_Cash_Receipts&amp;diff=5624"/>
		<updated>2024-10-23T17:40:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Apply Cash Receipts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CASHREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; CashRec_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Apply Cash Receipts screen is used to enter cash receipts and apply them against open AR invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Applying Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
To apply cash to an invoice, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Cash Receipt&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. Then enter the Custno (customer number) or Company (customer name). The system will automatically bring up all open invoices for that customer. Select the appropriate Cash Account and enter the Cash Amount from the customer. Then, check which invoices to apply the cash payment to, and the system will automatically allocate the amount of the payment across the invoice(s) selected. The allocated amount can be change by editing the Paid Amt column in the bottom grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apply_Cash_Receipt_to_Customer_Invoices.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter an open credit, enter the amount of the credit in Cash Amount and click Save. A modal window will display asking &amp;quot;Create Open Credit with Un-Applied Balance?&amp;quot; Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. A second modal window will display with fields for the AR Account, Description, and Invoice Status. Fill these out and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to issue the unapplied amounts as an Open Credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Select_Account_for_Open_Credit.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the payment has been allocated across the selected invoices, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custno/Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select the customer that the payment is from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invno:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter/select a specific invoice to pay with the cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment Account/Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for adjustments to the invoice (bad debt, bank fees, write-off, etc). Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Acct:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the appropriate Cash account from the drop down box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Currency:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will default based on the Cash Account selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Amount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount Account:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The number and description of the offsetting account that will be used for customer discounts. Can be set to default to a specific account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the cash receipt; this may be the check number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a reference number for the bank deposit (optional); this may be the check number, date or a sequential number of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date when the transaction will go into Adjutant. This is often referred to as a the accounting date, because this is when the transaction will show as posted to the general ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Postmark Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The PostMark Date is the &amp;#039;paid&amp;#039; date. This is the date which is primarily used for calculating discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Project ID:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Use this field to tie the cash receipt to an existing project in Adjutant, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Phase:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the phase of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the cash receipt type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notes:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Leave any applicable notes or comments for this cash receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total balance for all invoices, including open credits and deposits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total adjustments entered into the Adj Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the total discounts entered into the DisC Amt fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unapplied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount unapplied to invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Applied:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Displays the amount applied to invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Paid Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount paid on a specific invoice. Will auto-fill when the record is selected, and can be manually overriden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disc Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of customer discount on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ajd Amt:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the amount of adjustment on a specific invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepayment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check either Open Credit or Deposit if the customer has paid in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select from Cash, Check, Credit Card, Other, or NSF (insufficient funds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include Paid Invoices:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check to display all paid invoices in the Invoice List grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Card Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment on the Apply Cash screen by following all of the same steps listed above for accepting payments in general, and then clicking the Pay With CC button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Pay_with_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This button will launch the Process Money screen defaulted to the Credit Card Money Type in the green Setup menu on the left side of the screen. Read more about the [[Process Money]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Process_money_cc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the payment is complete on the Process Money screen, return to the Apply Cash screen and click the Save Cash Rec button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to complete the cash receipt in Adjutant and apply the credit card payment to an invoice or create an open credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Save_cash_rec.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Save_cash_rec.png&amp;diff=5623</id>
		<title>File:Save cash rec.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Save_cash_rec.png&amp;diff=5623"/>
		<updated>2024-10-23T17:38:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Pay_with_cc.png&amp;diff=5621</id>
		<title>File:Pay with cc.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Pay_with_cc.png&amp;diff=5621"/>
		<updated>2024-10-23T17:28:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Processmoney&amp;diff=5605</id>
		<title>Processmoney</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Processmoney&amp;diff=5605"/>
		<updated>2024-10-21T17:38:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page Processmoney to Process Money: Adjust wiki name to match screen name&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Process Money]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Process_Money&amp;diff=5604</id>
		<title>Process Money</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Process_Money&amp;diff=5604"/>
		<updated>2024-10-21T17:38:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: Mwillard moved page Processmoney to Process Money: Adjust wiki name to match screen name&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ProcessMoney_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The point of sale Process Money screen in Adjutant is accessed through the Sales Order screen and allows users to accept and process customer payments directly within the system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Process_money.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fields/Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Post Mark Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This date is calculated based on the CASHDATE rule, which offsets the posting date from the date the payment is received on the Process Money screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date the payment is accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open Balance&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Current open balance for the selected sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Payment amount to be processed in this transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount discounted from the sales order balance as part of the payment. This discount is posted to a designated General Ledger (GL) account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Positive or negative adjustments to be applied to the sales order balance as part of this payment. The adjustment will be posted to a designated General Leger (GL) account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Balance&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Sales order balance after payment, discount and adjustment are applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Payment amount, plus surcharge amount if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Surcharge Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Surcharge applied to the transaction. Only visible when certain Money Types are selected in the green Setup Menu on the left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Check #/Reference #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The payment reference, such as a check number or another identifying number, to track the specific payment method or transaction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Tender&amp;#039;&amp;#039; For cash payments, the exact value of the cash given should be entered into this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Change Due&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GL Account payment will be posted to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Bank deposit number for Bank Reconciliation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SO #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Sales Order which payment will be applied to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Credit Card Payments ==&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment via credit card reader or by manually entering credit card details into the appropriate fields. &lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Process_money_credit_card.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To process a credit card payment on the Process Money screen, first select Credit Card as the Money Type from the green Setup menu on the left. This selection will reformat the screen, displaying fields tailored specifically for credit card transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Setup_Menu_credit_card.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Process Credit Card Payment Manually === &lt;br /&gt;
To process a credit card without the use of a credit card reader:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1. Enter Payment Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Fill in the following details:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit Card Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Input the customer’s credit card number.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Expiration Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the expiration date of the credit card.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCV2/CVC2/CID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the card’s security code, usually located on the back of the card.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Street Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Street number portion of the customer&amp;#039;s address&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Zipcode&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Customer&amp;#039;s Zipcode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2. Validate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the Validate button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to confirm the information entered is valid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3. Process&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the Process button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to process the credit card transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, the Customer CC Data attribute can be added to the customer&amp;#039;s Organization and allows for the information entered above to be saved in the system for future purchases. When this attribute is in use, and credit cards have been saved, these cards can be accessed on the Process Money screen via the Saved Cards drop down menu. &lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Credit_card_data_attribute.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]] [[category: Order Entry]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Process_Money&amp;diff=5603</id>
		<title>Process Money</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Process_Money&amp;diff=5603"/>
		<updated>2024-10-21T17:38:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mwillard: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== General Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ProcessMoney_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The point of sale Process Money screen in Adjutant is accessed through the Sales Order screen and allows users to accept and process customer payments directly within the system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Process_money.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fields/Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Post Mark Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This date is calculated based on the CASHDATE rule, which offsets the posting date from the date the payment is received on the Process Money screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date the payment is accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open Balance&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Current open balance for the selected sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Payment amount to be processed in this transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Discount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The amount discounted from the sales order balance as part of the payment. This discount is posted to a designated General Ledger (GL) account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adjustment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Positive or negative adjustments to be applied to the sales order balance as part of this payment. The adjustment will be posted to a designated General Leger (GL) account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Balance&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Sales order balance after payment, discount and adjustment are applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transaction Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Payment amount, plus surcharge amount if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Surcharge Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Surcharge applied to the transaction. Only visible when certain Money Types are selected in the green Setup Menu on the left side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Check #/Reference #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The payment reference, such as a check number or another identifying number, to track the specific payment method or transaction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cash Tender&amp;#039;&amp;#039; For cash payments, the exact value of the cash given should be entered into this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Change Due&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GL Account payment will be posted to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bank Dep #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Bank deposit number for Bank Reconciliation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SO #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Sales Order which payment will be applied to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Credit Card Payments ==&lt;br /&gt;
Credit cards can be accepted for payment via credit card reader or by manually entering credit card details into the appropriate fields. &lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Process_money_credit_card.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To process a credit card payment on the Process Money screen, first select Credit Card as the Money Type from the green Setup menu on the left. This selection will reformat the screen, displaying fields tailored specifically for credit card transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Setup_Menu_credit_card.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Process Credit Card Payment Manually === &lt;br /&gt;
To process a credit card without the use of a credit card reader:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1. Enter Payment Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Fill in the following details:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit Card Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Input the customer’s credit card number.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Expiration Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the expiration date of the credit card.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCV2/CVC2/CID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the card’s security code, usually located on the back of the card.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Street Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Street number portion of the customer&amp;#039;s address&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Zipcode&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Customer&amp;#039;s Zipcode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2. Validate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the Validate button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to confirm the information entered is valid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3. Process&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the Process button in the yellow Actions menu on the left side of the screen to process the credit card transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, the Customer CC Data attribute can be added to the customer&amp;#039;s Organization and allows for the information entered above to be saved in the system for future purchases. When this attribute is in use, and credit cards have been saved, these cards can be accessed on the Process Money screen via the Saved Cards drop down menu. &lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Credit_card_data_attribute.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]] [[category: Order Entry]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mwillard</name></author>
		
	</entry>
</feed>